2017 FUSION Owner`s Manual

2017 FUSION Owner’s Manual
2017 FUSION Owner’s Manual
owner.ford.com
ford.ca
March 2016
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Fusion
Litho in U.S.A.
HE5J 19A321 AA
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2016
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20160205213240
Table of Contents
Supplementary Restraints
System
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.......................................12
Special Notices................................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................13
Export Unique Options..................................13
Principle of Operation..................................39
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................40
Front Passenger Sensing System.............41
Side Airbags.....................................................43
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags........44
Safety Canopy™............................................44
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......46
Airbag Disposal...............................................47
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................48
Remote Control..............................................48
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................53
Environment
Protecting the Environment........................15
Child Safety
MyKey™
General Information.......................................16
Installing Child Restraints.............................17
Booster Seats..................................................25
Child Restraint Positioning..........................27
Child Safety Locks.........................................28
Principle of Operation..................................54
Creating a MyKey............................................55
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56
Checking MyKey System Status...............56
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................57
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................57
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation..................................30
Fastening the Seatbelts................................31
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................34
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................35
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................35
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance................................................37
Seatbelt Extension.........................................37
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................58
Keyless Entry.....................................................61
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release..........................................................63
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System........................65
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................66
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..........................38
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................67
Audio Control..................................................68
1
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Voice Control...................................................69
Cruise Control.................................................69
Information Display Control.......................70
Heated Steering Wheel................................70
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control..............................117
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
Without: Sony Audio System................119
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System.....................120
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................122
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................125
Cabin Air Filter................................................125
Remote Start..................................................125
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers..........................................71
Autowipers.........................................................71
Windshield Washers......................................72
Lighting
General Information......................................73
Lighting Control...............................................73
Autolamps........................................................74
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................75
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................75
Daytime Running Lamps.............................76
Automatic High Beam Control..................76
Front Fog Lamps............................................78
Direction Indicators........................................78
Interior Lamps.................................................78
Ambient Lighting...........................................80
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position...................127
Head Restraints.............................................127
Manual Seats.................................................129
Power Seats....................................................129
Memory Function...........................................131
Rear Seats.......................................................133
Heated Seats..................................................134
Climate Controlled Seats..........................135
Rear Seat Armrest........................................136
Universal Garage Door
Opener
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows...............................................81
Global Opening and Closing......................82
Exterior Mirrors................................................82
Interior Mirror...................................................84
Sun Visors.........................................................84
Moonroof..........................................................84
Universal Garage Door Opener................137
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points................................142
Storage Compartments
Center Console..............................................144
Overhead Console........................................145
Instrument Cluster
Gauges...............................................................86
Warning Lamps and Indicators................89
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............92
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................146
Keyless Starting............................................146
Starting a Gasoline Engine........................147
Engine Block Heater....................................149
Information Displays
General Information......................................93
Information Messages................................102
2
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Active Park Assist.........................................185
Rear View Camera.......................................190
Unique Driving Characteristics
Auto-Start-Stop.............................................151
Cruise Control
Fuel and Refueling
Principle of Operation................................194
Using Cruise Control...................................194
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................195
Safety Precautions.......................................153
Fuel Quality....................................................154
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................154
Running Out of Fuel....................................156
Refueling..........................................................157
Fuel Consumption.......................................159
Emission Control System..........................160
Driving Aids
Automatic Transmission............................163
Driver Alert.....................................................202
Lane Keeping System................................203
Blind Spot Information System..............207
Cross Traffic Alert.......................................209
Steering.............................................................212
Pre-Collision Assist......................................213
All-Wheel Drive
Load Carrying
Using All-Wheel Drive................................168
Load Limit........................................................217
Brakes
Towing
General Information.....................................173
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................173
Electric Parking Brake..................................174
Hill Start Assist..............................................176
Towing a Trailer.............................................222
Recommended Towing Weights............223
Essential Towing Checks..........................224
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......226
Transmission
Driving Hints
Traction Control
Breaking-In.....................................................228
Economical Driving.....................................228
Driving Through Water...............................228
Floor Mats.......................................................229
Principle of Operation.................................178
Using Traction Control................................178
Stability Control
Roadside Emergencies
Principle of Operation.................................179
Using Stability Control...............................180
Roadside Assistance...................................231
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................232
Fuel Shutoff...................................................232
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................233
Post-Crash Alert System..........................235
Spinout Detection.......................................235
Transporting the Vehicle...........................236
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation..................................181
Rear Parking Aid.............................................181
Front Parking Aid..........................................182
Side Sensing System..................................183
3
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 2.7L EcoBoost™.......................................267
Brake Fluid Check........................................268
Washer Fluid Check....................................269
Changing the 12V Battery.........................269
Checking the Wiper Blades......................270
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................271
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................271
Removing a Headlamp..............................273
Changing a Bulb...........................................274
Bulb Specification Chart...........................276
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................278
Towing Points................................................236
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need...............238
In California (U.S. Only)............................239
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).....................240
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................241
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................241
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................242
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only).............................................................243
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).............................................................243
Vehicle Care
General Information...................................279
Cleaning Products.......................................279
Cleaning the Exterior..................................279
Waxing............................................................280
Cleaning the Engine.....................................281
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................281
Cleaning the Interior...................................282
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.......................282
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................283
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............283
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................283
Vehicle Storage............................................284
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart..........................245
Changing a Fuse..........................................254
Maintenance
General Information...................................256
Opening and Closing the Hood..............256
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L
EcoBoost™................................................257
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................258
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L...................259
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™...............................................260
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................261
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™/
2.5L/2.7L EcoBoost™.............................261
Engine Oil Check...........................................261
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................262
Engine Coolant Check...............................263
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 1.5L EcoBoost™/2.0L EcoBoost™/
2.5L...............................................................266
Wheels and Tires
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................286
Tire Care..........................................................292
Using Summer Tires..................................308
Using Snow Chains....................................308
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........309
Changing a Road Wheel.............................312
Technical Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™/2.0L EcoBoost™/
2.5L................................................................318
Technical Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................319
4
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
SYNC™ Applications and Services......376
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................381
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................390
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................321
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................321
Engine Specifications - 2.5L....................322
Engine Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™................................................323
Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L EcoBoost™......323
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™......325
Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L..............................326
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™......327
Vehicle Identification Number................327
Vehicle Certification Label.......................328
Transmission Code Designation............329
Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™...............................................330
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................333
Capacities and Specifications - 2.5L....336
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™...............................................340
SYNC™ 3
General Information...................................398
Home Screen..................................................411
Using Voice Recognition............................412
Entertainment...............................................419
Climate............................................................429
Phone................................................................431
Navigation.......................................................437
Apps.................................................................445
Settings...........................................................448
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................460
Accessories
Accessories....................................................473
Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................475
Audio System
Scheduled Maintenance
General Information...................................345
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
CD.................................................................346
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio............................348
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
CD.................................................................350
Digital Radio..................................................354
Satellite Radio..............................................356
USB Port.........................................................359
Media Hub......................................................359
General Maintenance Information........477
Normal Scheduled Maintenance.........480
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................483
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........485
Appendices
End User License Agreement.................496
Type Approvals..............................................512
SYNC™
General Information...................................360
Using Voice Recognition...........................362
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............364
5
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
6
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E154903
A
Right-hand side.
B
Left-hand side.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
See Owner's Manual
Air conditioning system
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
E162384
Anti-lock braking system
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
Battery
Battery acid
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
7
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Brake system
Front airbag
Cabin air filter
Front fog lamps
Check fuel cap
Fuel pump reset
Child safety door lock or unlock
Fuse compartment
Child seat lower anchor
Hazard warning flashers
Child seat tether anchor
Heated rear window
Cruise control
Heated windshield
Do not open when hot
Interior luggage compartment
release
Engine air filter
Jack
Engine coolant
Keep out of reach of children
E71340
E161353
Engine coolant temperature
Lighting control
Engine oil
Low tire pressure warning
Explosive gas
Maintain correct fluid level
Fan warning
Note operating instructions
Fasten seatbelt
Panic alarm
8
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, (e.g., your contact information), to
offer you products or services that may
interest you. Data may be provided to our
service providers such as part suppliers
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data.
We retain this data only as long as
necessary to perform these functions or to
comply with law. We may provide
information where required in response to
official requests to law enforcement or
other government authorities or third
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if
equipped), if you choose to use connected
apps and services, such as SYNC Vehicle
Health Report or MyFord Mobile App, you
consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by
Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
Parking aid
E139213
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
Shield the eyes
E167012
Stability control
E138639
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
9
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries. See SYNC™ (page 360).
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
10
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 360).
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 360).
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
11
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
We offer a number of convenient ways for
you to contact us and help to manage your
account.
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Call 1-800-727-7000.
For more information about Ford Credit
and access to the Account Manager, go to
www.fordcredit.com.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
refer to the Warranty Manual that is
provided to you along with your Owner’s
Manual.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
Never place front seat mounted
rear-facing child or infant seats in
front of an active passenger airbag.
12
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING
WARNING
Use of wireless plug-in devices in the
OBD Data Link Connector (DLC) may
allow unauthorized third parties to
gain access to vehicle systems and data
which could impair the function of various
vehicle systems, including safety-related
systems. The DLC should only be used by
a repair facility that operates in accordance
with Ford’s service and repair instructions.
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
13
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
15
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free
at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
contact Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in
safety seats made especially for their
height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds
from the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. We recommend
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot
days, the temperature in the trunk or
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to these
high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
16
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child
Child size, height, weight, or age
Infants or
toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Small children
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
Larger children 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
•
•
•
You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 41).
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
17
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Recommended restraint
type
Child Safety
•
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 pounds (18
kilograms) or less (generally age four or
younger).
•
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.
Standard safety belts
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
E142528
1.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
18
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142533
19
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will provide extra
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
Inflatable safety belts
E142528
1.
Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142534
10.
Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
20
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142530
E146524
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable safety belt and pull
upward until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard safety belt, the
inflatable safety belt's unique lap portion
locks the child seat for installation. The
ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to
move freely is normal, even after the lap belt
has been put into the automatic locking
mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with safety belt systems that would
otherwise require a locking clip.
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
21
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
7.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142534
10.
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a collision, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
22
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
Child Safety
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat
symbol.
WARNINGS
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where seat back and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back below the symbols
as shown. Follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child seat with LATCH
attachments. Follow the instructions on
attaching child safety seats with tether
straps.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used
to attach the child seat. For forward-facing
child seats, the top tether strap must also
be attached to the proper top tether
anchor, if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child seat.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
E142535
23
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches
(46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with
rigid LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child seat manufacturer's instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached
to that anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
When used in combination, either the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors
may be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
24
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
1.
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat. For outboard
seating positions, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts. For the center
seating positions, route the tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also
be removed.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
E144274
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position, then open
the tether anchor cover.
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E144275
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
E142595
25
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
•
•
•
•
•
Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
Can the child sit without slouching?
Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
E70710
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
•
Types of Booster Seats
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E68924
•
Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
26
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
WARNINGS
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
27
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Restraint
Type
Combined
weight of
child and
child seat
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
Rear facing Up to 65 lb
child seat
(29.5 kg)
Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt
and LATCH
only
and top
(lower
tether
anchors
anchor
and top
tether
anchor)
X
X
Rear facing Over 65 lb
child seat
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
X
X
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
127).
X
X
X
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
28
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
X
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
29
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Properly restrain
children 12 and under in the rear seat
whenever possible.
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
Seatbelts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather. They could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear seatbelts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your seatbelt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
of the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seatbelt properly.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific seatbelt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the seatbelt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
30
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
•
Seatbelt warning light and chime.
•
Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
Seatbelts
The seatbelt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the seatbelts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. The pretensioners
may also activate when the Safety Canopy
is deployed.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
E142588
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the seatbelt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the seatbelt should be
positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
E142587
1.
Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
E142590
31
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the seatbelt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all seatbelts should be checked
for proper function.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and
pull webbing out again in a slow and
controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver seatbelt.
The belt and retractor assembly
must be replaced if the seatbelt
assembly automatic locking retractor
feature or any other seatbelt function is
not operating properly when checked by
an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in crashes.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed
in passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 16).
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seatbelts have both
the vehicle sensitive locking mode and the
automatic locking mode.
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Standard seatbelts
32
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
E142591
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
1.
Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This indicates the
seatbelt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the rear inflatable seatbelt.
If the rear inflatable seatbelt deploys,
it will not function again. You must
have an authorized dealer replace
the rear inflatable seatbelt.
Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts
(second row only–if equipped)
The rear inflatable seatbelts are fitted in
the shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outboard seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt remains cool to the touch.
E146363
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag located in the
shoulder seatbelt webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
1.
Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until the entire belt is
pulled out.
33
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
•
•
The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front seatbelts.
Impact sensors located in various parts
of the vehicle.
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body
than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes
and in some side impact crashes and
rollover crashes. The fact that the rear
inflatable seatbelt did not inflate in a crash
does not mean that something is wrong
with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation.
The rear inflatable seatbelts will function
like standard restraints in everyday usage.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt will inflate from inside the
webbing.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
E146365
E145664
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
34
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
1.
Pull the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
If...
Then...
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 12 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before The safety belt warning light and indicator
the ignition switch is turned to the on posichime remain off.
tion...
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid the system turning
on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you
place on the front passenger seat, only the
front seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
35
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
If...
Then...
You and the front seat passenger buckle
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
switch this feature off, the intent of
the system is to remind you to wear
your safety belt to improve your chance to
survive an accident. We recommend you
leave the system switched on for yourself
and others who may use the vehicle.
1.
Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the
procedure within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light turns on.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
36
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNINGS
Persons who fit into the vehicle's
seatbelt should not use an extension.
Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
Only use extensions provided free of
charge by Ford Motor Company
dealers. The dealer will provide an
extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Never use seatbelt extensions to
install child restraints.
Do not use a seatbelt extension with
an inflatable seatbelt.
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the belt across the torso, over
the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 279).
37
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Personal Safety System™
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage
sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
38
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To reduce the
risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
39
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance
of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters)
between an occupant’s chest and the
driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat back, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 46).
40
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
between the seat and the center console.
Check the passenger airbag off or pass
airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag
status. Failure to follow these instructions
may interfere with the front passenger seat
sensing system.
E142846
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system. This could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
E227975
The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator that
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled).
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
The indicator lamp is at the top center of
the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps illuminate for
a short period of time when you first switch
the ignition on to confirm it is functional.
To reduce the risk of possible serious
injury: Do not stow objects in the
seatback map pocket or hang
objects off a seatback if a child is in the
front passenger seat. Do not place objects
underneath the front passenger seat or
41
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the
passenger front airbag and seat-mounted
side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty.
•
•
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.
•
When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminatse the ON lamp and remains
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is
not sitting properly in the seat. If this
happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit
even after this, advise the person to
ride in the rear seat.
When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the OFF lamp and stays lit
to remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
If you install the child restraint and the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the
restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
Occupant
Passenger airbag status
indicator
Passenger airbag
Empty
OFF: Lit
Disabled
ON: Unlit
Child
OFF: Lit
Disabled
ON: Unlit
Adult
OFF: Unlit
ON: Lit
42
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Enabled
Supplementary Restraints System
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light illuminates, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat may appear
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
described in the list above.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 46).
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need (page
238).
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
43
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
KNEE AIRBAGS
Driver and passenger knee airbags are
located under or within the instrument
panel. During a crash, the restraints control
module may activate the driver and
passenger knee airbags (individually or
both) based on crash severity and
respective occupant conditions. Under
certain crash and occupant conditions, the
driver and passenger knee airbags may
deploy (individually or both) but the
corresponding front airbag may not
activate. As with front and side airbags, it
is important to be properly seated and
restrained to reduce the risk of death or
serious injury.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
•
Make sure the knee airbags are
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 46).
Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
46).
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain
airbags as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
44
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the curtain
airbag.
E75004
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including
the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front
and rear side windows identified by a
label or wording on the headliner or
roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 46).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it
is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
45
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
The seatbelt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The seatbelt pretensioners and rear
inflatable seatbelts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal and
side crashes and rollovers.
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front seatbelt
system, the adaptive collapsible steering
column, driver airbag, passenger airbag,
knee airbag(s), seat mounted side airbags,
Safety Canopy and optional rear inflatable
seatbelts. Based on the type of crash, the
restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or a backup
tone (if equipped). Routine maintenance
of the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
•
•
The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
A series of five beeps will be heard (If
equipped). The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem, the light
or both are repaired.
46
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
•
•
The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
47
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 48).
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of
the following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other short
distance radio transmissions, for example
amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems. If the frequencies are
jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
E218399
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
48
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Using the Key Blade
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
The key cylinder is under a cap on the driver
door handle.
To remove the cap:
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.
E151956
1.
Insert the key blade into the slot on the
bottom of the handle and apply
upward pressure.
2. While maintaining upward pressure,
move the cap rearward to release it.
Gently remove the key while doing so.
E218400
Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.
To install the cap:
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
E151957
49
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
1.
Place the cap just forward of the key
cylinder.
2. Applying pressure to the cap, move it
forward until it is in place. You may
hear a snap as it engages.
1.
Push the release button and pull the
key blade out.
Make sure you have properly installed the
cap by trying to move it rearward.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See Information Messages (page
102).
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
E218401
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
E218400
50
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
E138625
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
has an extended operating range.
If your vehicle has automatic climate
control, you can configure it to operate
when you remote start your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 117). A manual
climate control system will run at the
setting it was set to when you switched
your vehicle off.
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery cover and the key
blade.
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
Car Finder
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
E138623
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
The remote start system does not work if
any of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch the feature off in the
information display.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
51
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 93).
Remote Control Feedback (If
Equipped)
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
LED.
Status
Solid green.
Remote start or
extension
successful.
Solid red.
Remote stop
successful; vehicle
off.
Blinking red.
Remote start or
stop failed.
Blinking green.
Waiting for status
update.
Note: You must press the push button
ignition switch on the instrument panel once
while applying the brake pedal before
driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
the duration is set to 10 minutes, the
duration extends by another 10 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 5
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend
the engine running time duration to a
maximum of 30 minutes.
Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
will not remote start if you do not follow this
sequence.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138626
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
E138625
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
than when starting due to ground reflection
and the added noise of your running
vehicle.
To remote start your vehicle:
1.
Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 93).
52
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Press the button once. Your
vehicle and the parking lamps
turn off.
Keys and Remote Controls
Memory Feature
You can program your intelligent access
key to recall memory positions. See
Memory Function (page 131).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 65).
53
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Standard Settings
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Not every vehicle includes the features
listed below. If your vehicle has this
equipment, then you cannot change the
following settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™.
MyKey mutes the audio system until
drivers, and in some instances,
passengers, fasten their seatbelts.
Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not mute.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
• Certain driver alerts, stability systems
or parking aids turn on automatically
when you use the MyKey system. For
example, Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
departure warning or forward collision
warning. Note: MyKey drivers may be
able to turn the lane departure warning
feature off, but this feature turns back
on automatically with every new key
cycle.
• Restricted touchscreen operation in
some markets. For example, MyKey
may prevent manual navigation
destination input while the vehicle is in
any gear other than park (P) or when
the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
speed.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions, if this feature is available
in your market.
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can program the
restrictions to all keys but one. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator
keys or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward
with an admin key.
54
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in your information display, providing
choices to switch them on or off, or to select
a more specific setting.
•
•
•
Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
•
Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and
a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display
when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
the limited volume. MyKey also
disables the automatic volume control.
Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not limit.
Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and
active for MyKey drivers. For example,
E911 or emergency assistance and the
do not disturb features stay on even if
a MyKey driver uses the feature's
control to switch it off.
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey.
1.
Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin
programming your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 93).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you restart your
vehicle with the programmed key or
transmitter.
Note: Make sure you label the programmed
MyKey so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
55
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You
cannot remove the MyKey restrictions
individually.
You can also program the optional MyKey
settings.
Programming or Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to program or
change your optional MyKey settings.
1.
Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to change the
settings of your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 93).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you restart your
vehicle with the programmed key or
transmitter.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
switch the engine off, you must use an
admin key to change or clear your optional
MyKey settings.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 93).
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you
have for your vehicle and determine when
all MyKeys have been deleted.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status at once. To
clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use
the information display.
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to determine how many admin
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
if an additional MyKey has been
programmed.
1.
Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin clearing
your MyKey programming. See
Information Displays (page 93).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
56
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition
I cannot create a MyKey.
Potential causes
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you
place the transmitter into the backup position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine
(page 147).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key. There always
has to be at least one admin key.
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable settings. · The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 55).
For vehicles with keyless start: No MyKey
· An admin transmitter is present when you
restrictions are available when starting the started your vehicle.
vehicle.
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 55).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 55).
I lost the only admin key.
· Purchase a new key or tranmitter from
your authorized dealer.
I lost a key.
· Program a spare key or transmitter. You
may need to see your authorized dealer.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
65).
MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
57
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.
Power Door Locks
Remote Control
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
You can use the remote control at any
time. The luggage compartment release
button only works when your vehicle speed
is about 3 mph (5 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
E138629
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators will flash.
E138628
A
Unlock.
B
Lock.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate a
change to the unlocking mode. Driver door
mode only unlocks the driver door when
you press the unlock button once. All door
mode unlocks all doors when you press
the unlock button once. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access. You can also change between the
unlocking modes using the information
display. See General Information (page
93).
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on the door window trim
illuminates when you lock the door. They
will remain illuminated for up to five
minutes after you switch the ignition off.
Door Lock Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch no longer
operates after 20 seconds. You must
unlock your vehicle with the remote control
or keyless keypad, or switch the ignition
on, to restore function to these switches.
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 93).
Locking the Doors
Note: Switch the ignition on and off after
changing the setting in the information
display.
E138623
58
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Locks
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the luggage
compartment are closed.
Equipped)
You must have the intelligent access key
within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Unlocking the Doors
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and
open the door. Make sure not to touch the
lock sensor area on the top of the handle.
Locking the Doors
E157085
Touch the top of the door handle to lock
your vehicle. There is a brief delay before
you can unlock your vehicle again.
E112203
If the central locking function does not
operate, lock the doors individually using
the key in the position shown. On the
left-hand side, turn the key clockwise to
lock. On the right-hand side, turn the key
counterclockwise to lock.
Note: Keep the door handle clean to make
sure the system operates correctly.
Mislock
If any door or the luggage compartment is
open, or if the hood is open on vehicles
with an anti-theft alarm or remote start,
the horn will sound twice and the lamps
will not flash. You can enable or disable
this feature in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 93).
Opening the Luggage Compartment
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the luggage
compartment.
59
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Opening the Luggage Compartment
To do this, lock your vehicle after you have
closed all the doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the front
of the door handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
E207425
Press the exterior release button hidden
above the license plate.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door when
the ignition is on and your vehicle speed
is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key
inside your vehicle after you close the last
door. If the system finds a key, all of the
doors will immediately unlock and the horn
will sound twice, indicating that a key is
inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
60
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Autounlock
The lights will not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp
control.
• Any door is open.
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the
accessory position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors
remain closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You press the push button ignition
switch.
Note: If you electronically lock your vehicle
after you switch the ignition off with the
driver door closed, the doors will not
autounlock.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock
Note: You can switch autounlock and
autolock on or off independently of each
other.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access
Keys
Autolock is not configurable in all markets.
If the autolock settings are not available
in your information display, then the
system is not configurable. See General
Information (page 93).
If you leave the ignition switched on, it
shuts off when it detects a certain amount
of battery drain, or after 45 minutes.
KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)
Illuminated Entry
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
The illuminated entry system will turn off
the lights if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• After 25 seconds of illumination.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
61
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for
step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You can also program a personal entry
code using the touchscreen.
Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
E138637
You can use the keypad to do the
following:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Release the luggage compartment.
• Recall memory seat and mirror
positions.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
The programmed entry codes recall driver
memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory
positions.
• Entry code 3 recalls driver 3 memory
positions.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner’s wallet card in the glove
box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also program up to five of
your own five-digit personal entry codes.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not
recall memory positions.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must press each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press 1·2 and hold for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
62
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
1.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times.
This mode turns off the keypad for one
minute and the keypad lamp flashes.
Anti-scan turns off after any of the
following occur:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch the ignition on.
• You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.
E155835
2. Remove the rubber covering (A) from
the cup holder. With the buttons facing
upward and the unlock button facing
the front of your vehicle, place the first
intelligent access key into the backup
slot (B).
3. Press the push button ignition switch
once and wait a few seconds.
4. Press the push button ignition switch
again and remove the key.
5. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot, and then press the
push button ignition switch.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad
simultaneously with the driver door closed.
You do not need to enter a code first.
Unlocking Only the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you switch on the
all door unlocking mode. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 58).
The factory-set code appears in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within
five seconds.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT RELEASE
Opening the Luggage Compartment
WARNINGS
Keep vehicle doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep keys
and remote transmitters out of a
child’s reach. Unsupervised children could
lock themselves in the trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within
five seconds.
Displaying the Factory-Set Code
Note: You need to have two programmed
keys for this procedure.
63
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
Locks
The handle is located inside the luggage
compartment either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or near the tail
lamps. It is composed of a material that
will glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
WARNINGS
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot
days, the temperature in the trunk or
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to these
high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
Pull the handle and push up on the luggage
compartment door (lid) to open from
within the luggage compartment.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release
handle that provides a means of escape
for children and adults if they become
locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with
the operation and location of the release
handle.
E144403
64
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Security
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and turns on the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in engine
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
If your programmed transmitters are lost
or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may result in vehicle starting
problems, especially if they are too close to
the key when starting your vehicle. Prevent
these objects from touching the coded key
when starting your vehicle. Switch the
ignition off, move all objects on the key
chain away from the coded key and restart
your vehicle if a problem occurs.
Store a spare intelligent access key away
from your vehicle in a safe place. You can
purchase replacement keys or remote
controls from an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
keys to your vehicle.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access key readily accessible.
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
SecuriLock®
The system helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before
beginning and that they remain closed
throughout the procedure. Carry out all
steps within 30 seconds of starting the
sequence. Stop and wait for at least one
minute before starting again if you carry
out any steps out of sequence.
The system arms when you switch the
ignition off.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with
a coded key, it is not operating correctly.
A message may appear in the information
display.
1.
Automatic Disarming
The system disarms when you switch the
ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys.
65
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
Security
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
E155835
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
2. Remove the rubber covering (A) from
the cup holder. With the buttons facing
upward and the unlock button facing
the front of your vehicle, place the first
intelligent access key into the backup
slot (B).
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
9. Wait five seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key
in the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock
your vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•
•
•
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If it
still does not work, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
66
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle
on within 12 seconds.
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 127).
E223492
3. Lock the steering column.
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 127).
E223369
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
67
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 131).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control
during memory recall cancels the operation.
The column responds to the adjustment
control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the
steering column will move to the full up
position to allow extra room to exit your
vehicle. The column will return to the
previous setting when you switch the
ignition on. You can enable or disable this
feature in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 93).
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
AUDIO CONTROL
To adjust:
• Tilt: press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: press the front or rear of the
control.
Select the required source on the audio
unit.
Operate the following functions with the
control:
The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if the
steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1.
Press the steering column control again
after encountering the new stopping
position.
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the column position.
E191234
A new stopping position is set. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it will stop just short of the end of
the column position.
68
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
A
Volume up.
B
Volume down.
C
Mute.
D
Mode.
Steering Wheel
E
Seek down or previous.
CRUISE CONTROL
F
Seek up or next.
Type 1
MODE
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio sources.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• seek through a track.
E197198
Type 2
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E222797
See Cruise Control (page 194).
E168194
Press the button to select or deselect voice
control. See your SYNC information.
69
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E144636
See Information Displays (page 93).
Information Display Control
Features
E144811
This control functions the same as the
center control on the faceplate. See
General Information (page 345).
Use this control to adjust the right side of
the information display. Navigate through
the screen and press OK to select.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)
See your SYNC information.
70
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Intermittent Wipe
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
A
B
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades.
C
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E169314
D
C
A
Shortest wipe interval
B
Intermittent wipe
C
Longest wipe interval
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
B
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
A
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
E169313
A
Single wipe
B
Intermittent wipe
C
Normal wipe
D
High speed wipe
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper
Blades (page 270). If that does not resolve
the issue, install new wiper blades. See
Changing the Wiper Blades (page 271).
Autowipers uses a rain sensor located in
the area around the interior mirror. The
rain sensor will continue to monitor the
amount of water on the windshield and
automatically adjust the speed of the
wipers.
71
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Autowipers Settings (If Equipped)
Autowipers default to on and remain on
until you switch it off in the information
display. With autowipers switched off, the
wipers operate in intermittent mode. See
General Information (page 93).
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E197526
A
High sensitivity
B
On
C
Low sensitivity
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers will
operate when the sensor detects a large
amount of water on the windshield. When
you select high sensitivity, the wipers will
operate when the sensor detects a small
amount of water on the windshield.
E169316
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
To operate the washers and spray the
windshield, pull the lever toward you.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing to clear any remaining washer
fluid. This feature can be switched on or
off in the information display. See General
Information (page 93).
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
72
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION
LIGHTING CONTROL
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
E142449
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
A
Off
B
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps
C
Headlamps
High Beams
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E162679
Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
73
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Headlamp Flasher
If equipped, the following also activate
when the lighting control is in the
autolamps position and you switch them
on in the information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 93).
E162680
Note: With the headlamps in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.
Pull the lever toward you slightly and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may
not activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps
are switched to auto or on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
to do so may result in a collision.
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers activate.
74
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
B
A
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
becomes discharged, the illuminated
components will switch to the maximum
setting.
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps
E165366
A
Press repeatedly or press and
hold to dim.
B
Press repeatedly or press and
hold to brighten.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator toward you again or
switching the ignition on.
E132712
Press repeatedly or press and hold until
you reach the desired level.
75
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also,
the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure
the headlamps are switched to auto or on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily
override autolamp control.
When switched off in the information
display, the daytime running lamps are off
in all lighting control switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
Type 1 - Conventional (NonConfigurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
The system will automatically turn on your
high beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the
tail lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
lighting, the system will turn off the high
beams before they distract other drivers.
The low beams remain on.
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display controls.
See Information Displays (page 93).
Note: If it appears that automatic control
of the high beams is not functioning
properly, check the windshield in front of
the camera for a blockage. A clear view of
the road is required for proper system
operation. Have any windshield damage in
the area of the camera’s field-of-view
repaired.
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays
(page 93).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system will go into low beam
mode until you clear the blockage. A
message may also appear in the instrument
cluster display noting the front camera is
blocked.
Type 2 - Configurable
76
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water
spots will not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam system. However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, you
will notice a decrease in the availability of
the high beam system, especially at start
up. If you want to change the beam state
independently of the system, you may
switch the high beams on or off using the
multifunction switch. Automatic control will
resume when conditions are correct.
E142451
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height
such as using much larger tires, may
degrade feature performance.
Manually Overriding the System
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to decide
when to switch the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
will switch on if:
• the ambient light level is low enough
• there is no traffic in front of the vehicle
• the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (52 km/h).
E169254
The high beams will switch off if:
• the system detects the headlamps of
an approaching vehicle or the tail
lamps of a preceding vehicle.
• vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h)
• the ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required
• the system detects severe rain, snow
or fog
• the camera is blocked.
When the automatic control has activated
the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk
will provide a temporary override to low
beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or turn
the lighting control switch from autolamps
to headlamps.
Activating the System
Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
93). Switch the autolamps on. See
Autolamps (page 74).
77
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)
The lamps will turn on when you have met
one of the following conditions:
•
•
•
You open any door.
You press a remote control button.
You press button A on the front interior
lamp.
Front Interior Lamp
Note: The front interior lamp buttons are
on the overhead console. The exact location
of each button on the overhead console
depends upon which roof, sunroof, and
window shade features are equipped on the
vehicle.
E142453
Press the control to switch the fog lamps
on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
Off and the high beams are not on.
Note: Press button B to switch the door
function off when you open any door. The
indicator lamp will light amber when the
door function is off. When the door function
is off and you open a door, the courtesy and
door lamps will stay off. Press button B
again to switch the door function back on.
The indicator lamp will light blue when the
door function is on. When the door function
is on and you open a door, the courtesy and
door lamps will light.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E169255
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
78
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Type 1
Type 2
A
B
C
D
D
A
B
C
D
E192153
E201073
A
Individual dome lamp.
A
All lamps on button.
B
Door function button.
B
Door function button.
C
All lamps off button.
C
All lamps off button.
D
Individual dome lamp.
D
Individual dome lamps.
You can switch individual map lamps on
independently by pressing a map lens.
79
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped)
E169470
You can switch dome lamps on by pressing
the button.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.
80
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Bounce-Back
POWER WINDOWS
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window closes fully.
Window Lock
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
E144072
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when
you lock the rear window controls.
One-Touch Up
Accessory Delay
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
81
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GLOBAL OPENING AND
CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See General
Information (page 93).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
E144073
Opening the Windows
A
Left-hand mirror
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows and
vent the moonroof. Release the button
once movement starts. Press the lock or
unlock button to stop movement.
B
Adjustment control
C
Right-hand mirror
To adjust a mirror:
1.
Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control will illuminate.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror switch again.
Closing the Windows
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
When closing the windows and
moonroof, you should verify they are
free of obstructions and make sure
that children and pets are not in the
proximity of the window openings.
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
To close the windows and moonroof, press
and hold the remote control lock button.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
125).
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 131).
Power Exterior Mirrors
Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
WARNING
The driver exterior mirror automatically
dims when the interior auto-dimming
mirror turns on.
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
82
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing will blink when you switch on the
turn signal.
Puddle Lamps
(If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
C
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
B
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
increase your visibility along the side of
your vehicle.
A
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If the blind spot mirror does not show any
vehicles in its viewing area and the traffic
in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance,
signal that you intend to change lanes.
Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic
is clear and carefully change lanes.
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and begin
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle will
transition to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 207).
83
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
84
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Bounce-Back
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
The moonroof will stop automatically and
reverse some distance if an obstacle is
detected while closing.
Touch and hold (C) within two seconds of
a bounce-back event to override this
function.
The sliding shade can be manually opened
or closed when the moonroof is closed.
Pull the shade toward the front of the
vehicle to close it.
Venting the Moonroof
Touch (B) to vent the moonroof. Touch
(C) to close it.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, touch the control a
second time.
E144499
A
Open
B
Vent
C
Close
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Touch (A) to open the moonroof. It will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Touch (A) again
to fully open the moonroof.
Touch (C) to close the moonroof.
85
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2
E144485
A
Tachometer
B
Information Display (Type 2 shown Type 1 similar)
C
Speedometer
D
Fuel Gauge
E
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Compass
Information Display
Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
Odometer
Trip Computer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
See General Information (page 93).
86
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.
See General Information (page 93).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
Shows the temperature of the engine
coolant. At normal operating temperature,
the needle will remain in the center section.
If the needle enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
cause once the engine has cooled down.
•
•
Note: Do not restart the engine until the
cause of overheating has been resolved.
WARNING
•
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
It may take a short time for the needle
to reach full after leaving the gas
station. This is normal and depends
upon the slope of pavement at the gas
station.
The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
at the gas station.
If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.
There is a small reserve left in the tank
when the fuel gauge reaches empty.
Fuel Gauge
•
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers at 50 mi
(80 km) to empty.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.
Variations:
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
87
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Type 3
E144486
A
Left Information Display
B
Speedometer
C
Right Information Display. See General Information (page 93).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
Left Information Display
See General Information (page 93).
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 93).
88
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Battery
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
The following warning lamps and
indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your
vehicle to make sure they work. If any
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
E151262
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 207). See
Information Messages (page 102).
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Brake System
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
E144524
indicate what mode the system
is in: See Using Cruise Control (page 194).
E144522
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by your authorized
dealer.
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
the adaptive cruise control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged
can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without ABS) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by your authorized dealer.
Cruise Control
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on.
Auto Start-stop (If Equipped)
E71340
It will illuminate to inform you
when the engine shuts down or
in conjunction with a message.
89
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
It will illuminate when you
engage the parking brake with
the ignition on.
Instrument Cluster
Direction Indicator
Front Airbag
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for
a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 274).
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Door Ajar
It will illuminate when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Grade Assist (If Equipped)
Electric Park Brake
E146190
It will illuminate when the
electric parking brake has a
malfunction.
E144523
Lights when you switch on the
grade assist function.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
Engine Coolant Temperature
A red beam of lights will
illuminate on the windshield in
E156133
certain instances when using
adaptive cruise control and/or the collision
warning system. It will also illuminate
momentarily when you start your vehicle
to make sure the display works.
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
Engine Oil
High Beam
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 261).
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hood Ajar
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
E159324
Fasten Seatbelt
Lane Keeping Aid (If Equipped)
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
your seatbelt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 35).
Illuminates when the lane
keeping system is activated.
E144813
90
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Instrument Cluster
Low Fuel Level
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
It will illuminate when the fuel
level is low or the fuel tank is
nearly empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Low Tire Pressure Warning
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
It will illuminate when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when
you switch the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate
when you switch the ignition on, or begins
to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first turned
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready
for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Parking Lamps
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until the engine is cranked, then
turn itself off if no malfunctions are
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times,
it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See Emission Control
System (page 160).
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain
or an AWD fault has been
detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Sport Mode
Illuminates when you switch the
sport mode on.
Service Engine Soon
E176099
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays illuminated
after the engine is started, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
of the vehicle emissions control system.
Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in
the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more
information about having your vehicle
serviced. See Emission Control System
(page 160).
Stability Control
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
E138639
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 180).
91
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control Off
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out
E130458
when you switch the system
back on or when you switch the ignition
off. See Using Stability Control (page
180).
Trunk Ajar
E159323
Displays when the ignition is on
and the trunk is not completely
closed.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Keyless Warning Alert
The horn will sound twice when you exit
your vehicle with the intelligent access key
and your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your
vehicle is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
92
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Display Controls
(Type 1 and Type 2)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E144637
•
Note: Your vehicle may or may not be
equipped with all the messages listed in this
chapter. Your vehicle will not display
messages of systems it is not equipped with.
•
•
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
•
•
Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Menu
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Trip 1 and 2
Distance to E
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Fuel Used
93
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 and 2
Average Fuel
Outside Temperature
All Values
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
Type 2
Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running
out of fuel.
Trip Odometer — Registers the distance of individual journeys.
Trip Timer — The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you
restart your vehicle.
Fuel Used — Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Outside Temperature — Shows the outside air temperature.
All Values — Shows the Distance to E, Trip Odometer, Trip Timer and Average Fuel.
Note: Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip, distance, time
and fuel information.
Fuel Economy
Distance to Empty
Inst Fuel Econ
Avg MPG
1
Long Term Fuel Economy
Fuel History
1
Average Fuel
94
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel Economy
All Values
1
Auto StartStop
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Type 2
Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before
running out of fuel.
Inst Fuel Economy - Shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy along
with your Avg MPG since the function was last reset.
Long Term Fuel Economy - Shows your long term fuel economy.
Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of your fuel history.
Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
All Values — Shows all fuel economy values (DTE, Inst Fuel Econ, Avg Fuel).
Auto StartStop - Available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about what
is happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 102).
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
Traction Ctrl - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
1
Cross Traffic - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cruise Control
Driver Alert
1
Adaptive or Normal
1
Driver Alert or Driver Alert Display
1
Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Intelligent AWD
1
Lane Keeping System
1
Pre-Collision
Mode
Alert, Aid or Both
Intensity
High, Normal or Low
Alert Sensitivity
High, Normal or Low
Active Braking - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
95
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Tire Monitor
1
Tire Pressure
Type 2
Settings
Vehicle
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Lighting
Autolamp delay
Off or XX Seconds
Locks
Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Remote Unlock
All Doors or Driver's Door
Switches inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Oil Life
Rest
oil Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset
Remote
Start
Climate Control
Auto or Last Settings
Driver Seat or Seats
and Wheel
Automatic or Off
Duration
5, 10 or 15 minutes
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Windows Remote Open or Remote Close
MyKey
Wipers
Courtesy Wipe or Rain Sensing
Create
MyKey
Hold OK to Create MyKey
911
Assist
Always On or User Selectable
Do Not
Disturb
On or Off
96
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Traction
Control
Always On or User Selectable
Max
Speed
Choose desired speed or Off
Speed
Minder
Choose desired speed or Off
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Clear
MyKeys
Display
Setup
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
Distance Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/L
Temper- Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)
ature
Tire Pres- psi, kPa or bar
sure
Language Choose your applicable setting
1
Type 2
•
Information Display Controls
(Type 3)
•
•
Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
•
•
•
•
•
E144638
•
•
Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
97
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Display Mode
Trip 1 & 2
Fuel Economy
Driver Assist
Settings
Information Displays
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories, then press the right arrow key
or OK to enter into that category. Press the
left arrow key as needed to exit back to the
main menu.
Display mode
Display Mode
Use the up/down arrow buttons to choose
between the following display options.
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
XXX mi (km) to empty
X
X
-
-
Fuel gauge
X
X
X
X
Round tachometer
-
-
X
X
Vertical tachometer
-
X
-
-
Engine coolant temp gauge
-
-
-
X
Intelligent AWD - AWD Gauge
•
•
•
•
XXX mi (km) to empty: Shows the approximate distance the vehicle will travel.
Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. When the fuel
level becomes low, the level indicator will change to amber. When the fuel level
becomes critically low, the level indicator will change to red. Note: When a MyKey®
is in use, low fuel warnings will display earlier. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Round tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with
your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine.
During SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the currently selected gear
will appear in the display.
Engine coolant temperature gauge: Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal
operating temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine
coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Trip 1 & 2
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
98
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 and 2
All Values
All Values — shows all trip values (Trip Timer, Odometer and Average Fuel).
•
•
•
Trip Odometer — Shows your accumulated trip distance.
Trip Timer— The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you
restart your vehicle.
Average Fuel — Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip.
Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the left
hand steering wheel controls.
Fuel Economy
Use the left and right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset
Fuel History
Average Speed - Hold OK to Reset
Auto StartStop
•
•
•
•
Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy, average
fuel economy and distance to empty.
Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your fuel history from the past 30 min, average
fuel economy and distance to empty.
Average Speed - shows your vehicles average speed since the function was last reset.
Auto StartStop - available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about what
is happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 102).
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
99
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Traction Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Adaptive Steering
Steering in D
Sport or Normal
Steering in S
Sport or Normal
Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cruise Control
Adaptive or Normal
Driver Alert
Driver Alert or Driver Alert Display
Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Lane Keeping System
Pre-Collision
Mode
Alert, Aid or Both
Intensity
High, Normal or Low
Alert Sensitivity
High, Normal or Low
Active Braking - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Tire Monitor
Tire Monitor - Hold OK to Reset
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Settings
Vehicle
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Lighting
Auto Highbeam - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autolamp Delay
Off or XX Seconds
Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Locks
Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
100
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Remote Unlock
All Doors or Driver First
Switch Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Mirrors
Autofold - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Oil Life
Rest
XXX% - Hold OK to Reset
Remote
Start
Climate Control
Auto or Last setting
Seats or Seats and
Wheel
Auto or Off
Duration
5, 10 or 15 minutes
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Seatbelts
Windows Remote Open or Remote Close
MyKey
Wipers
Courtesy Wipe or Rain Sensing
Create
MyKey
Hold OK to Create MyKey
911
Assist
Always On or User Selectable
Do Not
Disturb
On or Off
Traction
Control
Always On or User Selectable
Max
Speed
Choose desired speed or Off
Speed
Minder
Choose desired speed or Off
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Clear
MyKeys
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
101
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Display
Setup
Distance Miles & Gallons, l/100km or km/l
Gauge
Display
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + Tach
Temper- °Fahrenheit or °Celsius
ature
Tire Pres- psi, kPa or bar
sure
Language Choose your applicable setting
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E144636
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages will
be removed automatically after a short
time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
Message
Action
Active Park Fault
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
102
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message
Action
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
195).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
195).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
195).
Normal Cruise Active
Automatic Braking
Turned Off
The system has disabled the automatic braking.
Front Sensor Not Aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down
The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.
AdvanceTrac®
Message
Action
Service AdvanceTrac
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.
AdvanceTrac Off On
The traction control has been switch on or off.
103
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Airbag
Message
Action
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.
Remove blockage.
Alarm
Message
Action
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 66).
Auto Start-Stop
Message
Action
Auto StartStop Press
Brake to Start Engine
The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal to
start.
Auto StartStop Press
The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal harder
Brake Harder to Activate
to start.
Auto StartStop Press a
Pedal to Start Engine
The engine needs to be restarted, press any pedal to start.
Auto StartStop Shift to
P, then Restart Engine
Select park for the system to restart the engine.
Auto StartStop Manual
Restart Required
The system is not functioning. A manual restart is required.
Auto StartStop Not
Available
Displays when conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop
system to function properly. See Auto-Start-Stop (page
151).
Engine Stopped
StartStop has shut off the engine automatically.
Engine Starting
StartStop is starting the engine automatically.
Engine On due to Vehicle The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being
Maneuvering
turned.
104
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Message
Action
Engine On due to
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being
Steering Wheel Maneuvturned.
ering
Engine On due to
Accessory Usage
Engine may be on to support high demand for electrical
accessories, such as operating power windows, rear defroster,
or when using the power point.
Engine On Normal Operation
Engine is on to support normal vehicle operation. Includes
external vehicle conditions, such as altitude, traffic, low
ambient temperature. Also includes battery outside optimal
operating conditions (state of charge and temperature), and
inadequate brake vacuum (can occur if the brake pedal is
depressed a number of times in succession).
Engine On due to Low
Temperature
Engine is on in order to increase the engine temperature to an
acceptable level.
Engine On due to
Outside Air Temp
Engine is on to support normal vehicle operation due to low
outside ambient temperature.
Engine On due to Engine Engine is on in order to increase the engine temperature to an
Warming
acceptable level.
Engine On due to
Selected Gear
Engine is on due to a low gear selection by the transmission.
Engine On due to Steep
Grade
Engine is on due to a steep road grade.
Engine On due to Key not
Detected
Engine is on due to no key being detected by the vehicle.
Engine On due to Driver
Door Opened
Engine is on due to the driver door being opened.
Engine On due to Driver
Belt Unbuckled
Engine is on due to the driver seat belt being unbuckled.
Engine On due to
Heating /Cooling
Engine is on to achieve or maintain interior compartment at
an acceptable level.
Engine On due to Power Engine is on, which is required to support the use of the power
Outlet in Use
outlet (110V).
Engine On due to Vehicle Engine is on due to the vehicle battery needing to be charged.
Charging
Deactivated by Driver
You have disabled the Start Stop feature.
105
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Message
Action
Engine Shuts Off In
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
The engine is getting ready to shut off.
Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.
Engine Shuts Off in
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on
the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.
All-Wheel Drive
Message
Action
AWD Temporarily
Disabled
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect
itself from overheating.
AWD OFF
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect
itself from overheating or if you are using the temporary spare
tire.
AWD Restored
The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and
clear this message after driving a short distance with the road
tire re-installed or after the system cools.
AWD Malfunction
Service Required
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
106
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
Message
Action
Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
The battery management system detects an extended lowvoltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal.
Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
Battery
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message
Action
Blindspot System Fault
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 207).
Cross Traffic Vehicle
Coming From X
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 207).
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 207).
Cross Traffic System
Fault
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
107
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Doors and Locks
Message
Action
X Door Ajar
The door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Trunk Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.
Hood Ajar
The hood is not completely closed.
Switches Inhibited
Security Mode
The system has disabled the door switches.
Factory Keypad Code {X
X X X X}
The factory keypad code displays in the information display
after system resets the keypad.
Driver Alert
Message
Action
Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested
Take a rest soon.
Fuel
Message
Action
Fuel Level Low
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Hill Start Assist
Message
Action
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.
See Hill Start Assist (page 176).
108
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Keys and Intelligent Access
Message
Action
To START Press Brake
A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.
No Key Detected
The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 146).
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
You pressed the start/stop button to switch off the engine
and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.
Accessory Power is
Active
Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.
Starting System Fault
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Failure
You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
system.
Not Enough Keys
Learned
You have not programmed enough keys to the system.
Key Battery Low Replace The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.
Soon
Could Not Program
Integrated Key
An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing
keys.
Vehicle is ON
A reminder that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine is
on.
109
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Lane Keeping System
Message
Action
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visib- The system has detected a condition that requires the windility Clean Screen
shield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunction Service Required
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
Wheel
wheel.
Maintenance
Message
Action
Low Engine Oil Pressure
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Change Engine Oil Soon
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil
Check (page 261).
Oil Change Required
The oil life left is at 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 261).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake fluid level is low, inspect the brake system immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268).
Check Brake System
The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Over
Temperature
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the
problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 263).
110
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Message
Action
Power Reduced to
Lower Engine Temp
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine
temperature.
Transport / Factory
Mode
Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. See an authorized dealer.
See Manual
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.
MyKey
Message
Action
MyKey not Created
You cannot program a MyKey.
MyKey Active Drive
Safely
MyKey is active.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Near Vehicle Top Speed
MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle
speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.
Check Speed Drive
Safely
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.
Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
The belt-minder turns on with a MyKey in use.
AdvanceTrac On MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.
Traction Control On MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.
MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.
Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.
111
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Park Aid
Message
Action
Check Front Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation
(page 181).
Check Rear Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation
(page 181).
Front Park Aid On Off
Front park aid status.
Rear Park Aid On Off
Rear park aid status.
Park Brake
Message
Action
To Release: Press Brake
and Switch
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
Park Brake Use Switch
to Release
The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is
attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed
exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued
driving.
Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is not fully applied.
Park Brake Not Released
The electric parking brake is not fully released.
Park Brake Maintenance The electric parking brake system has been put into a special
Mode
mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
See an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction
Service Now
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition
that requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Park Brake System
Overheated
Numerous park brake applies have overheated the system.
Wait 2 minutes before attempting to apply again.
112
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Power Steering
Message
Action
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system detects a condition that requires
service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
The power steering system detects a condition that requires
service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Pre-Collision Assist
Message
Action
Pre-Collision Assist
Malfunction
There is a system malfunction with the pre-collision assist
system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not
Available Sensor
Blocked
The pre-collision assist system radar is blocked because of
poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice, mud, water in
front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to
resolve. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not
Available
There is a system malfunction with the pre-collision assist
system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Remote Start
Message
Action
To Drive: Turn Key to On
A reminder to turn the key on to drive your vehicle after a
remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Start Button
A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
113
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Seats
Message
Action
Memory Recall Not
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.
Permitted While Driving
Memory {0} Saved
Shows where you have saved your memory setting.
Starting System
Message
Action
To START Press Brake
A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle.
Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.
Pending Start Cancelled
The system has cancelled the pending start.
Cranking Time Exceeded
The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message
Action
Tire Pressure Low
One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 309).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 309).
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 309). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
114
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Traction Control
Message
Action
Traction Control Off /
Traction Control On
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off or on. See Using Traction Control (page 178).
Spinout Detected
Hazards Activated
A spinout has occurred and the hazards are on.
Transmission
Message
Action
Transmission Malfunction Service Now
Contact an authorized dealer.
Transmission Overheating Stop Safely
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as it is possible.
Transmission Over
Temperature Stop
Safely
The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop in
a safe place as soon as it is possible.
Transmission Service
Required
Contact an authorized dealer.
Transmission Too Hot
Press Brake
Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.
Transmission Limited
Function See Manual
The transmission has limited functionality. See an authorized
dealer.
Transmission Warming
Up Please Wait
Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you
drive.
Transmission Not in Park
A reminder to shift into park.
Press Brake Pedal
You need to depress the brake pedal.
Select S to confirm Stay Displays when a button needs to be pressed again to enter
in Neutral Mode
neutral hold. See Automatic Transmission (page 163).
Select L to Confirm Stay
in Neutral Mode
Transmission Adjusted
The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.
115
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Message
Action
Transmission AdaptMode
The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.
Transmission IndicatMode Lockup On
The transmission is locked and unable to select gears.
Transmission IndicatMode Lockup Off
The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears.
116
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E144491
A
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
B
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
C
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
D
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 125).
E
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
F
MAX Defrost: Adjust the control to turn on defrost. Outside air flows through
the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to
defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
117
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
G
MAX A/C: Adjust the control for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows
through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on,
and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
H
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
Note: At least one of these buttons illuminates on when the system is on.
I
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats (page 134).
J
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
K
Fan speed indicator: Illuminates to indicate fan speed.
118
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITHOUT: SONY
AUDIO SYSTEM
E198922
A
Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
(page 134).
B
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
C
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
D
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
119
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
E
Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the passenger
side.
F
Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on
and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 135).
G
MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
H
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
I
AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired
temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside
or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
J
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
K
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 125).
L
MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the
windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automatically
adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear
the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also
automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
M
Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the driver side.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AUDIO SYSTEM
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.
120
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
E225754
A
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.
B
MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
C
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
D
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
121
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
E
Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
(page 134).
F
Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on
and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 135).
G
Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the
passenger side.
H
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
I
Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side.
J
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 125).
K
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
L
MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the
windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automatically
adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear
the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also
automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
M
AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired
temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside
or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
General Hints
WARNING
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up. If the
windows fog up, follow the settings
for demisting the windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
122
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
outside temperatures, the system directs
airflow to the windshield and side window
vents. In addition, the fan may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with manual climate control
Vehicle with automatic climate control
1
Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
Press the AUTO button.
2
Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
Recommended Settings for Heating
Vehicle with manual climate control
Vehicle with automatic climate control
1
Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
Press the AUTO button.
2
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
3
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
123
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with manual climate control
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
2
Drive with the windows fully open until
you feel cold air through the air vents.
Vehicle with automatic climate control
Press the MAX A/C button.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Vehicle with manual climate control
Vehicle with automatic climate control
1
Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
Press the AUTO button.
2
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
3
Select the instrument panel air vents
using the air distribution buttons.
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
Vehicle with manual climate control
Vehicle with automatic climate control
1
Select the windshield air vents using the Press the defrost button.
air distribution buttons.
2
Press the A/C button if the indicator is
off.
3
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
4
Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
124
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Climate Control
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
E184884
and fog. The heated rear window
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time. Start the engine before you
switch the heated rear window on.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 477).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
REMOTE START (If Equipped)
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle.
The climate control system works to
achieve comfort according to your previous
settings.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system
to its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back
on, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page 93).
125
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated seats do not
automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster
and heated mirrors automatically turn on.
126
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied.
127
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
The head restraints consist of:
WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
A
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
B
Two steel stems.
C
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
D
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Front seat and rear seat outboard head
restraints
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1.
Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
E138642
Installing the Head Restraint
Rear center head restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Tilting Head Restraints
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E138645
128
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
The driver and passenger manual seats
may consist of:
E144631
A
B C
D
E144727
1.
Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to the
rearward, un-tilted position.
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
A bar to move the seat backward
and forward.
B
A control to adjust the lumbar of
the seatback (driver seat only).
C
A lever to adjust the height of the
seat (driver seat only).
D
A lever to adjust the angle of the
seatback.
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving.
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving.
Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat's
safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injuries in the event of a crash.
Note: Driver seat shown, passenger seat
similar.
129
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
A
Seats
6-way power seat
E176793
130
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
10-way power seat
E144632
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following features:
E165608
131
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
•
•
•
Driver seat.
Power mirrors.
Power steering column.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked
to a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Locks (page
58).
The memory control is on the driver door.
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
E223340
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
control - power seat, mirror, or steering
column (or any memory button) during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Saving a PreSet Position
1.
Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
2. Press and hold the SET button until
you hear a single tone.
3. Press the desired preset button until
you hear a single tone.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls or
intelligent access (IA) keys.
You can save up to two preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.
After you have saved your desired memory
preset positions:
Recalling a PreSet Position
1.
Press and hold the desired preset
button for about three seconds until
you hear a single tone.
2. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.
Note: A preset memory position can only
be recalled when the ignition is off, or when
the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N)
if the ignition is on and the vehicle is not
moving.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 2, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
132
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat position rearward up to two inches
(five centimeters) when you switch the
ignition off.
The driver seat will return to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 93).
REAR SEATS
Note: Your vehicle may have split
seatbacks that you must fold individually.
Note: Make sure the center safety belt is
unbuckled before folding the seatback.
To lower the seat back(s) from inside the
vehicle, do the following:
E144634
1. Pull the handle to release the seatback.
2. Push the seatback forward.
133
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E164098
3. Stow the safety belt in the stowage
clip. This will prevent the safety belt
from getting caught in the seat latch.
When raising the seat back(s), make sure
you hear the seat latch into place.
E146941
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.
134
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)
Heated Seats
Cooled Seats
WARNING
The cooled seats will only function when
the engine is running.
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
E146309
To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and
off. More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the cooled seats are on, the feature will
turn itself off. You will need to reactivate
it.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
Climate controlled seat air filter
replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is
not needed.
E146322
135
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)
E144635
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder.
136
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
E142657
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. As well as being programmed for
garage doors, the system transmitter can
be programmed to operate entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door
locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
by calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
137
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
E142658
1.
With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away
from the HomeLink button you want
to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously,
press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. DO NOT release either one until
the HomeLink indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1.
Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further
action is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed
yet. See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
138
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
1.
Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1.
Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
1.
Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter
until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
E142660
139
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
1.
Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.
A
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
B
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142661
A.
Red indicator light
B.
Green indicator light
1.
Press and hold one of the buttons on
the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will change
from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want
to program. The indicator light on the
visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
E142662
1.
Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will
flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator
lights on the garage door opener motor
unit should now flash purple.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must
be changed out of program mode. To do
this:
140
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and
the indicator light should blink slowly to
indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are
pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
141
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point
Locations
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the front of the center console.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
Do not use a power point for
operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect
use of the power points can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: The power point will turn off when
the ignition is switched off or the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the power point and blow the
fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
E193395
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point may open to the right or upward.
142
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
143
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
Center Console with Rotary
Control (If Equipped)
CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped)
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
A
B
C
E143942
A
Cup holder.
B
Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point and USB
port.
C
Auxiliary power point.
E222012
144
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
A
Front storage compartment with
USB ports and auxiliary power
point.
B
Cup holder.
C
Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point and media
hub.
D
110 volt AC power point.
E
Auxiliary power point.
F
Switch pack.
Storage Compartments
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E224352
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
145
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION
KEYLESS STARTING
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Ignition Modes
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
E144447
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
Off: Turns the ignition off.
•
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
Without applying the clutch pedal
(manual transmission) or brake pedal
(automatic transmission), press and
release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
•
Without applying the clutch pedal
(manual transmission) or brake pedal
(automatic transmission), press and
release the button once.
Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may
not start when the vehicle starts.
146
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
•
Press the clutch pedal (manual
transmission) or brake pedal
(automatic transmission), and then
press the button for any length of time.
An indicator light on the button
illuminates when then ignition is on and
when the engine starts.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle to shift the transmission
out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
Failure to Start
The system does not function if:
• The key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
1.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the
engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15
minutes, you are limited to a 15-second
engine cranking time. You need to wait 60
minutes before you can crank the engine for
60 seconds again.
E155835
2. Remove the rubber covering (A) from
the cup holder. With the buttons facing
upward and the unlock button facing
the front of your vehicle, place the first
intelligent access key into the backup
slot (B).
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Starting Your Vehicle
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
147
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
Apply the parking brake.
Fully depress the brake pedal.
Shift into park (P).
Fully press the accelerator pedal.
Starting and Stopping the Engine
5. Briefly press the push button ignition
switch.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Interacting with your vehicle, for
example pressing the brake or
accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown any time the ignition is on
using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 93).
• During the countdown before
shutdown, you are prompted to press
OK or RESET (depending on your type
of information display) to temporarily
switch the feature off (for the current
ignition cycle only).
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 20
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
After 20 seconds, you can no longer start
your vehicle if it does not detect a valid
passive key.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If your vehicle is left running for 30
minutes without any interaction, it
automatically shuts down.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
This feature automatically shuts down
your vehicle if it has been idling for an
extended period. The ignition also turns off
to save battery power. Before your vehicle
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down. If you do not intervene
within 30 seconds, your vehicle shuts
down. Another message appears in the
information display to inform you that your
vehicle has shut down to save fuel. Start
your vehicle as normal.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Briefly press the push button ignition
switch.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. When you switch
it off temporarily, it turns on at the next
ignition cycle.
148
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
1.
Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
149
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Using the Engine Block Heater
The engine block heater plug is located in
a housing in the left fog lamp bezel. Open
the hinged, circular door and make sure
the receptacle terminals are clean and dry
prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if
necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It will achieve
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation. If
you use the heater longer than three hours,
this will not improve system performance
and will use unnecessary electricity.
150
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
•
•
•
•
•
AUTO-START-STOP (If Equipped)
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically shutting off and restarting
the engine while your vehicle is stopped.
The engine will restart automatically when
you release the brake pedal. In some
situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
•
•
•
•
To maintain interior comfort
To recharge the battery
•
Note: Power assist steering is turned off
when the engine is off.
•
WARNINGS
The engine may restart
automatically if required by the
system.
•
Switch the ignition off before
opening the hood or performing any
maintenance. Failure to do so may
result in serious injuries due to automatic
engine restart.
•
•
Note: The system allows multiple
successive Auto StartStop events, but it
may not operate in conditions of heavy
traffic or in extended low speed operation.
Always switch the ignition off before
leaving your vehicle, as the system
may have turned the engine off, but
the ignition will still be on and automatic
restart may occur.
The green Auto StartStop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
The Auto StartStop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
93).
If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey Auto
StartStop indicator light, it is
illuminated when automatic engine stop
is not available due to one of the above
noted conditions not being met.
E146361
Enabling Auto StartStop
The system is automatically enabled every
time you start your vehicle if the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
Automatic Engine Restart
The Auto StartStop button is not
pressed (not illuminated).
Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (4 km/h) after the vehicle has
been initially started.
Your vehicle is stopped.
Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
•
•
151
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Your foot is on the brake pedal.
The transmission is in drive (D).
The driver's door is closed.
There is adequate brake vacuum.
The interior compartment has been
cooled or warmed to an acceptable
level.
The front windshield defroster is off.
The steering wheel is not turned rapidly
or is not at a sharp angle.
The vehicle is not on a steep road
grade.
The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
Elevation is below approximately
10000 feet (3048 meters).
Ambient temperature is moderate.
Your foot is removed from the brake
pedal.
You press the accelerator pedal.
Unique Driving Characteristics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Disabling Auto StartStop
You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
The driver safety belt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
The transmission is moved from drive
(D).
Your vehicle is moving.
The interior compartment does not
meet customer comfort when air
conditioning or heat is on.
Fogging of the windows could occur
and the air conditioning is on.
The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
The maximum engine off time is
exceeded.
When you press the Auto StartStop
button while the engine is stopped
automatically.
The heated windshield is turned on.
E221544
Press the Auto StartStop button located
on the center console to switch the system
off. The button will illuminate. The system
will only be deactivated for the current
ignition cycle. Press the button again to
restore Auto StartStop function.
Any of the following conditions may result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
•
•
The blower fan speed is increased or
the climate control temperature is
changed.
An electrical accessory is turned on or
plugged in.
If your vehicle is in an Auto StartStop state
and you shift the transmission to reverse
while the brake is not depressed, a
message telling you to press the brake will
appear. You must press the brake pedal
within 10 seconds, or a shift to park and a
manual restart will be required.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber Auto
StartStop indicator light is flashing,
automatic restart is not available. The
vehicle must be restarted manually. See
Information Displays (page 93).
152
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
•
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
•
Fuels can cause serious injury or
death if misused or mishandled.
•
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel may contain benzene, which is
a cancer-causing agent.
•
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
•
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
153
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors could cause
an adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, wash the affected areas
immediately with plenty of soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience any adverse reactions.
Fuel and Refueling
•
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
•
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
E161513
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane
rating of 87. Some fuel stations offer fuels
posted as regular unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating below 87, particularly in
high altitude areas. We do not recommend
fuels with an octane rating below 87.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, to
provide improved performance, we
recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow.
The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage
compartment floor covering.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
154
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
Fuel and Refueling
4-Door - Vehicles with full size spare
wheel and 4-Door or 5-Door - Vehicles
with Temporary Mobility Kit
5-Door - Vehicles with full size spare
wheel
E217477
E162864
155
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Wagon - Vehicles with Temporary
Mobility Kit
Wagon - Vehicles with full size spare
wheel
E185369
E197588
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine. If your vehicle is
out of fuel and on a steep slope, more
fuel may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
156
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
1.
Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages and remove the fuel tank
filler cap.
Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a
fuel tank filler cap.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel system filler neck. This
may damage the fuel system filler neck or
its seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or properly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 154).
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they will not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
157
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
B
C
D
E206911
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
1.
Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler
cap.
158
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
A
A
Type 1: Left hand side - press the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
B
Type 1: Right hand side - press
the fuel tank filler door to open
it.
C
Type 2: Left hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
D
Type 2: Right hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
Fuel and Refueling
A
B
A
E206912
4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E139202
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will
open.
E119081
5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
then slowly remove it.
6. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.
A
FUEL CONSUMPTION
E139203
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the
empty reserve varies and should not be
relied upon to increase driving range. When
refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge
indicates empty, you might not be able to
refuel the full amount of the advertised
capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
B
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower
position B when refueling. Holding the
fuel pump nozzle in the higher position
A may affect the flow of fuel and shut
off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel
tank is full.
159
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for
driving. The usable capacity of the fuel
tank is the amount of fuel that can be put
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty. The advertised capacity is the total
fuel tank size – it is the combined usable
capacity plus the empty reserve.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
records during summer and winter show
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower
fuel economy.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
•
•
•
Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of
driving (this is your engine’s break-in
period); a more accurate measurement is
obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles
(3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also,
fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel
gauge readings are not accurate ways to
measure fuel economy.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter that will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards.
1.
Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill ups,
fill the fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
160
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
•
•
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
1.
Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 157).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
161
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1.
15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
162
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Park (P)
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure you shift the gearshift
lever to park (P). Switch the ignition
off and remove the key whenever you leave
your vehicle.
With the transmission in park (P), your
vehicle locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning. Always
come to a complete stop before putting
your vehicle into and out of park (P). An
audible chime sounds once you select park
(P).
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than a few seconds will limit
engine rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
When the ignition is turned off, your vehicle
will automatically shift into park (P). If the
ignition is turned off while the vehicle is
moving, it will first shift into neutral (N)
until a slow enough speed is reached. Your
vehicle will then shift into park (P)
automatically.
Automatic Return to Park
Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission
Note: This feature will not operate when
your vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or
neutral tow.
Putting your vehicle in gear:
Your vehicle has a safety feature that will
automatically shift your vehicle into park
(P) when any of the following conditions
occur:
• You turn the vehicle off.
• You open the driver's door with your
safety belt unlatched.
• Your safety belt is unlatched while the
driver's door is open.
If you turn your vehicle off while moving,
your vehicle will first shift into neutral (N)
until it slows down enough to shift into
park (P) automatically.
E222981
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fully press down the brake pedal.
Move the selector to the desired gear.
Come to a complete stop.
Move the selector to park (P).
Note: If you have waited an extended
period of time (2-15 minutes) before starting
your vehicle, unlatching your safety belt will
cause this feature to activate, even with the
driver's door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly
if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If
your door ajar indicator does not illuminate
when you open the driver’s door or the
indicator illuminates with the driver’s door
closed, see your authorized dealer.
163
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Grade Assist
Reverse (R)
With the selector in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the selector in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Stay in Neutral Mode
E224429
Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in
Neutral mode when entering an automatic
car wash. Failure to do this could result in
vehicle damage not covered by warranty.
Press the grade assist button to activate
grade assist. The grade assist lamp will
appear in the instrument cluster. Press the
button again to switch the system off.
Stay in Neutral mode allows your vehicle
to stay in neutral when you exit your
vehicle. Your vehicle must be stationary to
enter this mode.
Grade assist:
• Provides additional grade braking with
a combination of engine motoring and
high-voltage battery charging to help
maintain vehicle speed when
descending a grade.
• As your vehicle determines the amount
of engine motoring and high-voltage
battery charging, you may notice the
engine speed increasing and
decreasing to help maintain your
vehicle speed when descending a
grade.
• The grade assist lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
• Move the transmission selector to
neutral (N).
• A message will appear in your
information display screen prompting
you to press the sport (S) button.
• Press the sport (S) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.
To exit Stay in Neutral mode, select a
different gear.
A message will appear in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
164
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Sport (S)
Putting the vehicle in sport (S):
• Provides additional engine braking and
extends lower gear operation to
enhance performance for uphill climbs,
hilly terrain or mountainous areas. This
will increase engine RPM during engine
braking.
• Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
• Provides gear selection more quickly
and at higher engine speeds.
E144821
SelectShift in drive (D):
• Provides a temporary manual mode
for performing more demanding
maneuvers where extra control of gear
selection is required (for example,
when towing or overtaking). This mode
will hold a selected gear for a
temporary period of time dependent
on driver inputs (for example, steering
or accelerator pedal input).
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission (If Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission. The SelectShift
Automatic transmission gives you the
ability to change gears up or down
(without a clutch) as desired.
SelectShift in sport (S):
• Provides a permanent manual gear
selection where full control of gear
selection is required.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift makes some
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage will
not be caused to the engine from
over-revving.
To exit SelectShift mode shift the
transmission into another gear (for
example, drive [D]).
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button.
Pull the + paddle on the steering wheel
to activate SelectShift.
•
•
Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
165
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
1-2
15 mph (24 km/h)
2-3
25 mph (40 km/h)
3-4
40 mph (64 km/h)
4-5
45 mph (72 km/h)
5-6
50 mph (80 km/h)
Transmission
Note: This feature will only function if your
12-volt battery has power. If vehicle battery
voltage is not sufficient, an external 12-volt
power source (for example, jumper cables,
battery charger or jump pack) may be
required to function the interlock override
switch.
The instrument cluster displays your
currently selected gear. If a gear is
requested but not available due to vehicle
conditions (low speed, too high engine
speed for requested gear selection), the
current gear will flash three times.
Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, the
transmission automatically downshifts for
maximum performance.
Use the brake-shift interlock override to
move your transmission from the park
position in the event of an electrical
malfunction. If your vehicle has a dead
battery, an external power source will be
required.
Note: In low traction conditions, you can
pull away in second gear using SelectShift.
To perform this operation, select drive (D)
or sport (S) mode and press the + toggle (if
equipped) or pull the + paddle (if equipped)
until 2 is displayed on the cluster. Your
vehicle is now ready to move in 2nd gear.
1.
Apply the parking brake and turn your
ignition off before performing this
procedure.
Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheels chocks if appropriate.
E180636
2. Locate your brake-shift interlock
access slot. The slot is located in your
center console storage bin. The access
slot does not have a label.
Note: Make sure that you correctly identify
the access hole as not to damage the media
hub.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
3. Using a tool, press and hold the brake
shift interlock switch. The shift buttons
on the instrument panel will flash when
your vehicle is in override mode.
4. With the override switch still held, press
the neutral button (N) to shift from
park.
5. Release the override button.
Note: For some markets this feature is
disabled.
166
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
6. Your vehicle will remain in Stay in
Neutral mode for wrecker towing
purposes or can be shifted to the
desired gear and driven (if possible).
7. Release the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
167
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Do not use a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided. If the
mini-spare tire is installed, the AWD
system may disable automatically and
enter front-wheel drive only mode to
protect driveline components. This
condition will be indicated by a warning in
the information display See Information
Messages (page 102). If there is a warning
message in the information display from
using the spare tire, this indicator should
turn off after reinstalling the repaired or
replaced normal road tire and cycling the
ignition off and on. It is recommended to
reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire
as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire
sizes between the front and rear axles
could cause the AWD system to stop
functioning and default to front-wheel
drive or damage the AWD system.
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to
power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input
from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities
in which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions.
Operating your vehicle under other than
those conditions could subject the vehicle
to excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display when an AWD
system fault is present See Information
Messages (page 102). An AWD system fault
will cause the AWD system to default to
front-wheel drive only mode. When this
warning message is displayed, have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional
vehicles, both on and off the highway.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display if the AWD system
has overheated See Information
Messages (page 102). This condition may
occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme
conditions with excessive wheel slip, such
as deep sand. To resume normal AWD
function as soon as possible, stop the
vehicle in a safe location and stop the
engine for at least 10 minutes. After the
engine has been restarted and the AWD
system has adequately cooled, the warning
message will turn off and normal AWD
function will return.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
•
•
168
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
•
•
•
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle
back onto the pavement only after
reducing your speed. Do not turn the
steering wheel too sharply while
returning to the road surface.
It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors,
with minor damage to your vehicle
rather than attempt a sudden return to
the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control
or rollover. Remember, your safety and
the safety of others should be your
primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to
disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll
Stability Control™ system while
attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
•
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is in
P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position or turn the vehicle off using the
start/stop button and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
•
Do not spin the wheels at over 35
mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
•
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
169
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid
"over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn the
steering wheel only as rapidly and as
far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering will
result in less vehicle control, not more.
Additionally, smooth variations of the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes
in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid
abrupt steering, acceleration or braking
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury. Use all
available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop,
avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel
movements.
If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e., from concrete
to gravel) there will be a change in the
way the vehicle responds to a
maneuver (steering, acceleration or
braking). Again, avoid these abrupt
inputs.
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Sand
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of the vehicle.
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep
sand. This will cause the AWD system to
overheat. After the system has cooled
down, normal AWD function will return.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and
cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
point that assistance may be required from
another vehicle. Remember, you may be
able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in
water, have the power transfer unit (PTU)
or rear axle serviced by an authorized
dealer.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and
proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
E142667
170
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will
use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill
without seeing what conditions are on the
other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
E143949
171
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,
it won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Since your vehicle is
equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not
“pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 173).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load
carrying capability. For this reason, Ford
Motor Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (such as lowering
kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise
the center of gravity can make it more likely
the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss
of control. Ford Motor Company
recommends that caution be used with
any vehicle equipped with a high load or
device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect driver and passenger safety.
Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis
components is recommended if the vehicle
is subjected to off-highway usage.
172
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
Brake Assist
GENERAL INFORMATION
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 283).
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you turn the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
E144522
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 89).
Brake Over Accelerator
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal may pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
173
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking brake
while moving will result in use of the
anti-lock braking system. Do not use
the electric parking brake system when the
vehicle is moving unless the normal brake
system is unable to stop the vehicle.
The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional handbrake. The operating
switch is located in the center console.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake and
leave your vehicle with the
transmission in park (P) (automatic
transmission) or in first gear (1) or reverse
(R) (manual transmission).
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the brake
pedal does not work or is blocked),
do not apply the electric parking brake
while the vehicle is moving. On bends, or
poor road surfaces or weather conditions,
emergency braking can cause the vehicle
to skid out of control or off the road.
Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions, for example, on
a steep hill, the electric parking brake may
reapply the brakes within three to ten
minutes.
Note: The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate for ten seconds, if the ignition is
turned off after the electric parking brake
has been applied, or the electric parking
brake has been applied after the ignition has
been turned off.
Note: You may notice various noises when
you apply and release the electric parking
brake. This is normal and no cause for
concern.
Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must apply the
electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.
Parking On a Hill (Vehicles With a
Manual Transmission)
If you park your vehicle facing uphill, move
the transmission to first gear (1) and turn
the steering wheel away from the curb. If
you park your vehicle facing downhill, move
the transmission to reverse (R) and turn
the steering wheel toward the curb.
Applying the Electric Parking
brake
WARNINGS
The brake system warning lamp will
flash during an electric parking brake
apply. If the brake system warning
lamp continues to flash, there could be a
problem with your electric parking brake.
E227395
Pull the switch up to apply the electric
parking brake.
174
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
The brake system warning lamp will flash
for approximately 2 seconds and then
illuminate to confirm that the electric
parking brake has been applied. See
Information Displays (page 93).
You can manually release the electric
parking brake by:
1. Turning the ignition on.
2. Pressing the brake pedal.
3. Pressing the electric parking brake
switch.
If you apply the electric parking brake when
your vehicle is moving, the brake system
warning lamp will illuminate and a warning
chime will sound. See Information
Displays (page 93).
When the electric parking brake is released,
the brake system warning lamp will turn
off.
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(6 km/h), the braking force is applied as
long as the switch is pulled. Releasing or
pressing the switch or pressing the
accelerator pedal will stop the braking
force.
Automatic release - drive away release
Your vehicle will automatically release the
parking brake if all of the following
conditions exist:
• The driver door is closed.
• The accelerator pedal is pressed.
• There are no faults detected in the
parking brake system.
Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake
You can release the electric parking brake
either manually by pressing the switch or
automatically.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking
brake will not automatically release. You
must release the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch.
Manual release
WARNING
Note: On manual transmission vehicles, if
the transmission is in neutral (N) when you
release the clutch pedal and press the
accelerator pedal, the electric parking brake
will release automatically.
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes after
you have released the parking brake,
there could be a problem with you braking
system. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Note: On manual transmission vehicles,
you must fully press the clutch pedal before
the drive away release feature will operate.
Drive as normal using the accelerator and
clutch pedals and the electric parking brake
will be automatically released.
The brake system warning lamp will go off
to confirm that the electric parking brake
has been released.
E227515
175
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
Note: The electric parking brake drive away
release makes starting on a hill easier. This
feature will release the parking brake
automatically when the vehicle has
sufficient drive force to move up the hill. To
assure drive away release when starting
uphill, press the accelerator pedal quickly.
WARNINGS
During all times, you are responsible
for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and
intervening, if required.
If the engine is revved excessively, or
if a malfunction is detected, the
system will be deactivated.
Driving with a Trailer
Depending on the slope and the weight of
the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
backwards slightly when you start on a
slope.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle will
remain stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows you time to move your
foot from the brake to the accelerator
pedal. The brakes release automatically
when the engine has sufficient torque to
prevent your vehicle from rolling down the
grade. This is an advantage when pulling
away on a slope, for example from a car
park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing
uphill into a parking space.
To prevent this from happening, do the
following:
1.
Pull the switch up and hold it in this
position.
2. Drive your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the engine
has developed sufficient driving force.
Battery With No Charge
WARNING
You will not be able to apply or
release the electric parking brake if
the battery is low or has no charge.
The system will activate automatically on
any slope that will cause significant vehicle
rollback. For vehicles with a manual
transmission, you can switch this feature
off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 93). The
system will remain on or off depending on
how it was last set.
If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.
HILL START ASSIST
Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate
the system is either on or off.
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into park
(P) (automatic transmission) or first gear
(1) (manual transmission).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto
Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available
while Auto Hold is active.
Using Hill Start Assist
1.
You must remain in your vehicle once
you have activated the system.
176
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Bring your vehicle to a complete
standstill. Keep the brake pedal
pressed and select an uphill gear (for
example, first (1) when facing uphill or
reverse (R) when facing downhill).
Brakes
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system will activate
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
on the slope without rolling away for
about two or three seconds. This hold
time will automatically be extended if
you are in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will release automatically.
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch this feature on or off if your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display.
See General Information (page 93). The
system remembers the last setting when
you start your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a
manual transmission and an information
display, you cannot turn the system on or
off. When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
177
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
Using the Information Display
Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 93).
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off
or on.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
USING TRACTION CONTROL
The stability and traction control
light:
WARNING
The stability and traction control
light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
E138639
•
•
•
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
E130458
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
178
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
Stability Control
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
•
•
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.
The stability and traction control light
flashes.
Your vehicle slows down.
Reduced engine power.
A vibration in the brake pedal.
The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 178).
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
179
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.
Stability Control
B
B
B
A
A
B
A
E72903
A
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
B
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control
system off, but when you shift into reverse
(R), the system deactivates.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Stability Control
(page 180).
180
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 54).
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations
of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when
moving on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Certain objects with surfaces that absorb
ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's
parking aid systems, traffic control
systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement
weather, air brakes, and external motors
and fans may also affect the function of
the sensing system; this may include
reduced performance or a false activation.
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing
system may detect that add-on device and
therefore provide warnings. It is suggested
that you disable the rear sensing system
when you attach an add-on device to your
vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
You can turn the system on or
off by pressing the parking aid
E139213
button. If your vehicle does not
have a parking aid button, the system can
be switched off through the information
display menu or from the pop-up message
that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 93).
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to
provide a warning to assist the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging your vehicle. The system may
not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 102).
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
181
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low
speed.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object,
a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning
tone repeat rate increases. The warning
tone sounds continuously when an object
is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front
bumper.
182
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 93). If your
vehicle has a parking aid button, you can
switch the system off by pressing the
button.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the
system provides visual indication only
when your vehicle is moving at 7 mph
(12 km/h) or below and an obstacle is
located inside the detection area. Once
your vehicle is stationary, the visual
indication will stop after 4 seconds.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM
Equipped)
The side sensing system uses the front and
rear side sensors to detect and map
obstacles that are near to the sides of your
vehicle. The side sensors are active when
the transmission is in any position other
than park (P).
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.
Note: Obstacles that enter the side
detection area without being detected and
mapped by the front or rear side sensors will
not be detected.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
front sensing system provides audio
warnings when your vehicle is moving and
the detected obstacle is moving towards
your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary,
the audio warning will be stopped after 2
seconds. Visual indication is always
present in reverse (R).
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any
other forward gear (for example, low (L),
sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio and visual warnings when
your vehicle is moving below a speed of
7 mph (12 km/h) and an obstacle is located
inside the detection area. Once the vehicle
is stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the
obstacles detected are within 12 in
(30 cm), the visual indication remains on.
E187810
Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from
the sides of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object close
to the side of your vehicle, an audible
warning sounds. As the object comes
closer to the side of your vehicle, the rate
of the audible warning increases. The rate
of the audible warning varies depending
on whether the obstacle is inside or outside
of the driving path of your vehicle.
183
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
When you shift to drive (D) or any other
forward gear, for example, low (L), sport
(S) or any forward gear in manual
transmission, the side sensing system
provides audible and visual distance
indication when your vehicle is moving at
7 mph (12 km/h) or below and obstacles
are detected within 12 in (30 cm), or when
obstacles are detected within 12–24 in
(30–60 cm) and are inside the driving path
of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle
the audible warning stops after 2 seconds
and the visual distance indication stops
after 4 seconds.
Equipped)
Note: If the obstacle remains within 12 in
(30 cm) visual distance indication remains
on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side
sensing system only provides visual
distance indication when your vehicle is
moving at 7 mph (12 km/h) or below, for
example when moving on a slope, and
obstacles are detected within 12 in
(30 cm). When you stop your vehicle the
visual distance indication stops after 4
seconds.
E190459
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
As the distance to the obstacle decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon. If there is no
obstacle detected, the distance indicator
blocks show greyed out.
If the side sensing system is not available,
the side distance indicator blocks will not
be present.
The side sensing system is not available
under the following condition:
• If you switch the traction control
system off.
When you shift to reverse (R), the side
sensing system provides audible and visual
distance indication when your vehicle is
moving and obstacles are detected within
12 in (30 cm), or when obstacles are
detected within 12–24 in (30–60 cm) and
are inside the driving path of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the audible
warning stops after two seconds.
The side sensing system may not be
available until you have driven
approximately the length of your vehicle
in order for the system to reinitialize if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
Note: Visual distance indication remains
on when the transmission is in reverse (R).
184
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
•
•
Parallel Park Out Assist automatically
steers your vehicle out of a parallel parking
space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
enter traffic.
The anti-lock brake system is
activated.
The traction control system is
activated.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during a park assist maneuver.
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular
Parking, Parallel Park Out Assist
The system may not correctly operate in
any of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
• One or more tires are improperly
inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist).
• The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck).
• The weather conditions are poor
(heavy rain, snow, fog, etc).
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause interference.
Active park assist does not apply the
brakes under any circumstances.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors
can affect the system's accuracy. Do not
clean the sensors with sharp objects.
The system detects an available parallel
or perpendicular parking space and
automatically steers your vehicle into the
space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
park your vehicle.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference (motorcycle
exhaust, truck air brakes or horns).
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a bike rack, trailer
or other object near the sensors on the
front or rear of your vehicle.
• You have attached an overhanging
object (surfboard) to the roof.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system.
185
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
•
•
A foreign object damages or obstructs
the front or rear bumper or side
sensors.
The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h) the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left-hand side or
right-hand side of your vehicle. If the
direction indicators are not used, the
system defaults to the passenger side of
your vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist - Parallel
Parking
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
E146186
lever or the right side of the
center stack once.
E130107
Note: You can also activate the Active Park
Assist system after you have already driven
partially or completely past a parking space.
To do so, press the Active Park button and
the system will inform you if you have
recently passed a suitable parking space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
When the system finds a suitable space,
it displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the screen. If your vehicle
is moving very slowly, you may need to pull
forward a short distance before the system
is ready to park.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or the
maneuver is interrupted (driver input), the
system switches off and you need to take
full control of your vehicle.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
The system displays instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel as possible to
the other vehicles while passing a parking
space.
186
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
E130108
Using Active Park Assist Perpendicular Parking
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
E146186
lever or the right side of the
center stack twice.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.
The system displays a message and a
corresponding graphic to indicate it is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to select searching
either to the left-hand side or right-hand
side of your vehicle.
Note: If you do not make a selection the
system will default to the passenger's side.
E186193
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
When the system finds a suitable space,
it displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the screen. If your vehicle
is moving very slowly, you may need to pull
forward a short distance before the system
is ready to park.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as perpendicular as possible
to the other vehicles while passing a parking
space.
187
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
The system displays instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space.
Note: If driven above approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist - Parallel Park
Out Assist
E146186
E186191
The system displays a message requesting
an indication of direction. Use the direction
indicator to signal which side of your
vehicle you want to exit the parking space.
E188012
188
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
While your vehicle is at rest in a
parallel parking space, press the
active park assist button.
Parking Aids
Deactivating the Active Park
Assist Feature
The system determines the clearance to
the front and rear of your vehicle and
automatically steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space (hands-free) while
you control the accelerator, gearshift and
brakes. The system visually and audibly
guides you to enter traffic.
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search.
• Driving above approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) during automatic steering.
• Switching off the traction control
system.
After the system has directed your vehicle
past the adjacent vehicle or object, it
guides you to take control of the steering
to complete the exit from the parking spot.
Note: If the clearance in front of your
vehicle allows easy departure, the Parallel
Park Out Assist feature might not be
available.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
in exiting perpendicular parking spaces,
damages to your vehicle may occur.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied
by a tone. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph
(5 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
189
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered sensors
can affect the system's functionality.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (0.4 m) away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel and 19 mph (30 km/h)
for perpendicular parking.
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward with
reverse [R] selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage
into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
WARNINGS
REAR VIEW CAMERA
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
190
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
WARNINGS
Reverse your vehicle as slow as
possible, higher speeds may limit
your reaction time to stop your
vehicle.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
Use caution when the rear cargo door
is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar,
the camera will be out of position
and the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the rear cargo
door is ajar. Some vehicles may not come
equipped with guidelines.
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
191
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
A
B C
D
E
Camera System Settings
You can access the rear view camera
system settings through the display screen.
See General Information (page 93).
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
F
E142436
A
Active guidelines
B
Centerline
C
Fixed guideline: Green zone
D
Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
E
Fixed guideline: Red zone
F
Rear bumper
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change the
steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
192
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Manual Zoom
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle may not
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently
increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P)
(automatic transmission).
• You apply the parking brake (manual
transmission).
E190459
The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.
193
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Setting the Cruise Speed
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator will change color.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
Changing the Set Speed
•
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes but a warning displays.
•
•
Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the Information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 1 km/h increments.
When you select mph as the display
measurement in the information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 1 mph increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
E197198
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Canceling the Set Speed
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Press and release ON.
Resuming the Set Speed
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Press and release RES.
E71340
194
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Switching Cruise Control Off
WARNINGS
Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
Press and release OFF when the system
is in stand by mode or switch the ignition
off.
Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections
or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or
when the road surface is slippery.
This could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
when towing a trailer that has trailer
brakes. The auto-brake component
of the adaptive cruise control system does
not operate the trailer brakes. Using
adaptive cruise control when towing a
trailer that has trailer brakes may result in
the loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
road.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
195
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET-. A green
indicator light, the current gap setting
and your set speed appear in the
information display.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
E164805
4. A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is
a vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
E222790
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
When Your Vehicle is Stationary
Press and release ON.
E144529
1.
2.
3.
4.
The indicator appears in the
information display.
E164805
The current gap setting and set speed also
appear in the information display.
196
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Follow a vehicle to a complete stop.
Keep the brake pedal fully pressed.
Press and release RES+.
The set speed automatically adjusts
to 20 mph (30 km/h). A green indicator
light and the current gap setting appear
in the information display.
Cruise Control
Following a Vehicle
If the system predicts that its maximum
braking level is insufficient, an audible
warning sounds while the system
continues to brake. The red warning bar
appears on the windshield. You should
take immediate action.
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not always decelerate
quickly enough to avoid a crash
without driver intervention. Always apply
the brakes when necessary. Failing to do
so may result in a crash, serious injury or
death.
Following a Vehicle to a Complete
Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
less than three seconds, your vehicle
automatically accelerates from a
stationary position to follow the vehicle
ahead when you release the brake pedal.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
more than three seconds, you must press
and release the RES+ button or the
accelerator pedal to accelerate from a
stationary position and follow the vehicle
ahead.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Gap Distance
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.
When you are following a vehicle and you
switch on your left directional indicator,
adaptive cruise control may provide a
small temporary acceleration to help you
pass.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
A
B
The vehicle applies brakes to slow the
vehicle to maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front. The maximum braking
which the system can apply is limited. You
can override the system by applying the
brakes.
E222791
197
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
A
Gap decrease.
B
Gap increase.
Cruise Control
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the graphic. Four gap distance settings
are available.
E164805
Adaptive cruise control, distance between vehicle settings
Set speed
mph ( km/h)
Graphic display,
bars indicated
between
vehicles
Time gap,
seconds
Distance gap
yd (m)
Dynamic behavior
62 (100)
1
1
31 (28)
Sport.
62 (100)
2
1.4
43 (39)
Normal.
62 (100)
3
1.8
55 (50)
Normal.
62 (100)
4
2.2
67 (61)
Comfort.
Each time you start the vehicle, the system selects the last chosen gap setting.
Changing the Set Speed
Overriding the System
•
WARNING
Whenever the driver presses the
accelerator pedal and overrides the
system, the system does not
automatically apply the brakes to maintain
the set distance from any vehicle ahead.
Press the accelerator pedal to override the
set speed and gap distance.
•
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
E144529
illuminates and the lead vehicle
graphic does not show in the information
display.
•
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
slower speed if following a slower vehicle.
198
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Press and release RES+ or SET-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 2 km/h increments.
When you select mph as the display
measurement in the information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 1 mph increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release RES+ or SET-.
Press and hold RES+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed. The set speed changes in
approximately 5 mph/10 km/h
increments.
Cruise Control
•
•
Hilly Condition Usage
Press the RES+ or SET- button to
change the set speed in increments of
approximately 1 mph or 2 km/h.
Hold the RES+ or SET- button to
change the set speed in increments of
approximately 5 mph or 10 km/h.
Select a lower gear during prolonged
downhill driving on steep slopes, such as
mountainous areas, when the system is
active. In such situations, the system needs
additional engine braking to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent the brakes from overheating.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it is applying brakes
for an extended period of time. This allows
the brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again when the brakes cool.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release OFF when the system
is in stand by mode or switch the ignition
off.
Press and release RES+. The vehicle
returns to the previously set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Detection Issues
Automatic Cancellation
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
WARNING
Automatic cancellation occurs if:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
Note: If the engine speed drops too low,
the information display indicates low engine
speed. Shift to a lower gear (manual
transmission only) to avoid automatic
cancellation.
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
some situations. The lead vehicle graphic
does not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
Park Brake Application
Automatic parking brake application and
cancellation occurs if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open
the door while stopped.
• Holding the vehicle at a stop
continuously for more than two
minutes.
199
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detections.
See an authorized dealer to have the radar
checked for proper coverage and
operation.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
• The system does not detect a lead
vehicle while stopped or driving at low
speeds.
Blocked Sensor
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
A
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
B
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
C
E145632
A message appears if something obstructs
the sensor's radar signals. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. The system cannot
detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function when something obstructs the
radar signal.
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
In these cases the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. The driver should stay
alert and intervene when necessary.
Note: You cannot see the sensor, it is
behind a fascia panel.
The following table lists possible causes
and actions for this message displaying.
200
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Cause
Action
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or obstructed in some way.
or remove the object causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean Wait a short time. It may take several
but the message remains in the display.
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface Do not use the system in these conditions
of the road may interfere with the radar
because it may not detect any vehicles
signals.
ahead.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, the system does
not automatically respond to lead vehicles
and automatic braking does not activate.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example,
when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition
either self clears or clears after a you
restart your vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
for slower vehicles. Always be aware
of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
201
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
When activated, the system will monitor
your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
System Warnings
The driver alert system is designed
to aid you. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment.
You are still responsible to drive with due
care and attention.
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system has two stages. At
first, the system issues a temporary
warning that you need to take a rest. This
message will only appear for a short time.
If the system detects further reduction in
driving alertness, it may issue another
warning that will remain in the information
display for a longer time. You can press OK
on the steering wheel control to clear the
warning.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
will be active at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h). When below the activation
speed, the information display will inform
the driver that the system is unavailable.
System Display
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only
issue a warning if required. You can view
the status at any time using the
information display. See General
Information (page 93).
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The alertness level is shown by six steps
in a colored bar.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the cluster
display.
E131358
The current assessment of your alertness
is within a typical range.
USING DRIVER ALERT
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 93).
202
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always drive with due care and
attention when using and operating
the controls and features on your
vehicle.
E131359
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
The status bar will travel from left to right
as the calculated alertness level
decreases. As the rest icon is approached
the color turns from green to yellow to red.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can
all limit sensor performance.
The yellow position indicates the first
warning is active and the red position
indicates the second warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is within the
typical range.
Large contrasts in outside lighting
can limit sensor performance.
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level will change
to grey for a short time and the information
display will inform you that the system is
unavailable.
If damage occurs in the immediate
area surrounding the sensor, have
your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
•
•
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Switching the ignition off and on.
Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short
period, the system will alert you to put your
hands on the steering wheel. The system
may detect a light grip or touch on the
steering wheel as hands off driving.
203
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out
of your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey
it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system.
E144813
E165516
Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center when
the system detects an unintended lane
departure.
Press the button on the steering
wheel stalk to switch the system
on or off.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. The system stores the
last-known selection for each of these
settings. You do not need to readjust your
settings each time you turn on the system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
E165517
A
Alert
B
Aid
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance
steering torque input toward the lane
center. If your vehicle continues drifting out
of the lane, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
E165515
204
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low
Normal
High
•
System Display
Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
The turn indicator is active.
Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain
or fog), traffic conditions (following a
large vehicle that is blocking or
shadowing the lane), or vehicle
conditions (poor headlamp
illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).
E151660
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
When you switch on the system, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
markings will display in the information
display. If you select aid mode when you
switch on the system, a separate white
icon will also appear or in some vehicles
arrows will display with the lane markings.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
•
•
•
•
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings will change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:
205
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Quick braking.
Fast acceleration.
Using the turn signal indicator.
Evasive steering maneuver.
Driving Aids
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
The last Alert warning or Aid intervention occurred a short time ago
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
206
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
A
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
A
E124788
207
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
For automatic transmissions, the Blind
Spot Information System remains on while
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
When the Blind Spot Information System
is alerting on a vehicle and the
corresponding turn signal is ON, the Blind
Spot Information System alert indicator
flashes as an increased warning level.
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and
snow in front of the sensors and/or driving
in heavy rain can cause system
degradation. Also, other types of
obstructions in front of the sensor can
cause system degradation. This is referred
to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
at the same time.
208
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Switching the System Off and On
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page
93). When the Blind Spot Information
System switches off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display shows
a system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
the Blind Spot Information System on or
off, the alert indicators flash twice.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the BLIS alert
indicators will remain ON and BLIS will no
longer provide any vehicle warnings. You
can clear the information display warning
but the alert indicators will remain
illuminated.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
remembers the last selected on or off
setting.
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in
two ways:
• After the blockage in front of the
sensors is removed or the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic
to allow the sensors to detect passing
vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
You can also have the Blind Spot
Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Blind Spot
Information System off. If your vehicle has
a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer
tow module, it is recommended to turn the
Blind Spot Information System off
manually. Operating the Blind Spot
Information System with a trailer attached
will cause poor system performance.
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the Cross Traffic Alert system as
a replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display. See Information
Messages (page 102).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross
Traffic Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions
while your transmission is in reverse (R).
209
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
fully obstructed. Reversing slowly helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect
vehicles that approach with a speed up to
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases
when the sensors are partially, mostly or
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
E142441
210
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an
amber alert indicator in the outside mirror
on the side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert
also sounds an audible alert and a
message appears in the information
display indicating a vehicle is coming from
the right or left. Cross Traffic Alert works
with the reverse sensing system that
sounds its own series of tones. See Rear
Parking Aid (page 181).
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
areas, this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 207). If the
Blind Spot Information System is blocked,
Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A
corresponding message appears in the
information display as soon as you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
area may limit vehicle detection.
211
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently,
the system can only be switched back on
at an authorized dealer.
False Alerts
STEERING
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no
factory equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert
with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross
Traffic Alert performance.
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
If the system detects an error, you
may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Obtain immediate service from
an authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will
appear in the information display. See
(page 93).
Switching the System Off and On
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic
Alert off in the information display. See
General Information (page 93). When
you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will
not receive alerts and the information
display will display a system off message.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
212
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
WARNINGS
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
Steering Tips
The system does not detect cyclists,
animals, pedestrians at night or
vehicles that are driving in a different
direction. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
The system does not operate during
hard acceleration or steering. Failure
to take care may lead to a crash or
personal injury.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
The system may fail or operate with
reduced function during cold and
severe weather conditions. Snow,
ice, rain, spray and fog can adversely affect
the system. Keep the front camera and
radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.
In situations where the vehicle
camera has limited detection
capability, this may reduce system
performance. These situations include but
are not limited to direct or low sunlight,
vehicles at night without tail lights,
unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians
with complex backgrounds, running
pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians,
or pedestrians that the system cannot
distinguish from a group. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
213
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Alert: When activated, a red warning light
flashes, an audible warning chime sounds
and a warning message shows in the
information display.
WARNINGS
This system is an extra driving aid. It
does not replace your attention and
judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail
to press the brake pedal when necessary,
you may collide with another vehicle.
Brake Support: The brake support system
assists the driver in reducing the collision
speed by lightly applying the brakes. If the
risk of collision further increases after the
warning light illuminates, the brake support
prepares the brake system for rapid
braking. This may be apparent to the driver.
The system does not automatically
activate the brakes, but if you press the
brake pedal, the system may apply full
force, even if the brake pedal is lightly
pressed.
The system cannot help prevent all
crashes. Do not rely on this system
to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain a safe distance and
speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System
Active Braking: Active braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent. The system may help
the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
the crash completely.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is active
at speeds above approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) and pedestrian detection is active
at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
another stationary vehicle, a vehicle
traveling in the same direction as yours, or
a pedestrian within your driving path, the
system is design to provide three levels of
functionality:
Blocked Sensors
1. Alert
2. Brake Support
3. Active Braking
E184569
E156131
214
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
or camera appears in the information
display, the radar signals or camera images
are obstructed. The radar sensor is located
behind a fascia cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. With an obstructed
radar, the Pre-Collision Assist system does
not function and cannot detect a vehicle
ahead. With the front camera obstructed,
the Pre-Collision Assist system does not
respond to pedestrians or stationary
vehicles and the system performance on
moving vehicles reduces. The following
table lists possible causes and actions for
when this message displays.
Cause
Action
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or remove the object causing the obstrucor obstructed in some way.
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporHeavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
with the radar signals.
automatically reactivate a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporSwirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
of the road may interfere with the radar
automatically reactivate a short time after
signals.
the weather conditions improve.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end
impact.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.
The windshield in front of the camera is
dirty or obstructed in some way.
Clean the outside of the windshield in front
of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is
clean but the message remains in the
display.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the camera to detect that there
is no obstruction.
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing
zone may change. This could cause missed
or false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
215
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message may display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. This message
deactivates automatically when operational
conditions are corrected (for example, when
the ambient temperature around the sensor
decreases or the sensor automatically
recalibrates successfully).
216
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
E198719
Payload
PAYLOAD
E143816
217
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
218
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower your
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to your vehicle,
personal injury or both.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
219
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
220
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
221
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Load Placement
TOWING A TRAILER
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in the Load Carrying
chapter. See Load Limit (page
217).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: Your vehicle may have
electrical items, such as fuses or
relays, related to towing. See
Fuses (page 245).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
222
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal
area. 2
2
Do not exceed 12 feet (1.11 meters )
for 1.5L
GTDI and 2.5L
TiVCT or 20
2
2
feet (1.86 meters ) for 2.0L GTDI.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation point.
Powertrain
Maximum trailer weight
1.5L GTDI
1000 lb (454 kg)
2.0L GTDI
2000 lb (907 kg)
2.5L TiVCT
1000 lb (454 kg)
2.7L GTDI
1000 lb (454 kg)
*
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
223
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
*
Towing
Trailer Brakes
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
WARNING
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 217).
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)
when load.
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Hitches
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.
224
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
1.
Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above
the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
you submerge the rear axle in water. Water
may contaminate the rear axle lubricant,
which is not a normal maintenance
inspection item unless there is a possibility
of a leak or other axle repair is required.
225
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Vehicles Equipped with 1.5L, 2.0L,
and 2.5L Engines
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
Emergency Towing
Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
the front wheels off the ground by using a
tow dolly. If you are using a tow dolly,
follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider.
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in position N. If
you cannot move the transmission into
N, you must override it and enable stay
in neutral mode. Failing to do so may
result in damage to the transmission.
See Transmission (page 163).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).
All-wheel Drive Vehicles
All-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
you cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
Vehicles Equipped with a 2.7L
Engine
You can tow your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground using the Neutral
Tow feature, or with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. If
you are using a vehicle transport trailer,
follow the instruction specified by the
equipment provider.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
Recreational Towing
•
•
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 117).
Neutral Tow
Enter Neutral Tow mode by doing the
following:
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
1.
226
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Tow only in the forward direction.
Release the parking brake.
Put the ignition in accessory mode by
pressing the engine START button
without pressing the brake pedal.
Towing
2. Select the neutral tow option under the
vehicle settings menu in the
information display. See General
Information (page 93).
3. Press and hold the OK button to start
the neutral tow process.
4. Press the brake pedal and select N on
the rotary shift transmission.
5. Turn the ignition off by pressing the
engine START button without pressing
the brake pedal.
If the process completes successfully:
•
•
the N on the rotary shift transmission
blinks slowly.
A confirmation message appears in the
information display.
Note: If the parking brake is applied, a
message appears in the information display.
Note: Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
Note: Start the engine and allow it to run
for five minutes at the beginning of each day
and every six hours (or fewer). Shut the
engine off and verify that a message
appears indicating neutral tow has been
engaged, before continuing to tow.
Exit Neutral Tow mode, make sure the
ignition is on (engine can be on or off),
press the brake pedal and select P on the
rotary shift transmission.
If the process is completed successfully,
a message appears indicating that neutral
tow has disengaged in both the instrument
cluster and rotary shift transmission
display P.
227
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
There are also some things you may want
to avoid doing because they reduce your
fuel economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back
home).
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.
228
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•
•
•
•
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
Check that the horn works.
Check that the exterior lights work.
Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
FLOOR MATS
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
229
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
230
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
•
•
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
24 hours a day, seven days a week.
For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare, if
provided with the vehicle (except
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation
kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
231
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel
to the engine. Not every impact will cause
a shutoff.
In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details
you may contact your dealer, you can call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
to switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the
engine by pressing the brake pedal and
the START/STOP button, or switch
on the ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without
pressing the brake pedal. Both ways
re-enable the fuel system.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will lose charge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
•
•
Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and
rear direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again to turn them
off.
232
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
an authorized dealer.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
E226509
A. Negative prong (–)
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
B. Positive prong (+)
233
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Remove the red cap from the positive
prong (B) on your vehicle before connecting
the cables.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1.
Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
1
3
4
2
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
E142664
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
1.
Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
234
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
4
2
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
1
SPINOUT DETECTION
If your vehicle detects a spinout and it
comes to a stop, the hazard warning
flashers turn on. A spinout detected
message appears in the information
display. The message may not appear if
your vehicle runs out of power.
3
After your vehicle's hazard warning
flashers turn on, you can switch them off
by:
• Pressing the hazard warning flasher
button.
• Pressing the remote control unlock
button.
• Pressing the remote control panic
button.
• Switching the ignition on and off twice.
E142665
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
235
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.
TOWING POINTS
Due to local market requirements in some
countries, some vehicles may be equipped
with a recovery hook.
Recovery Hook Location
If your vehicle is equipped with a screw-in
recovery hook, it is located with the spare
tire kit.
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
Installing the Recovery Hook
There is an installation point for the
recovery hook located behind the fascia.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Note: The screw-in recovery hook has a
left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise
to install it. Make sure that the recovery hook
is fully tightened.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
236
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
E146284
E188420
Remove the recovery hook cover by prying
it off at the notch with a screwdriver or
similar object.
Note: Use a soft cloth to cover the prying
tool. This helps prevent scratch marks to
the vehicle's paint.
237
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Website
www.owner.ford.com
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
In Canada:
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Away From Home
Telephone
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
In the United States:
Twitter
Mailing address
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
1.
Additional information and resources are
available online:
238
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
1.
Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
239
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
240
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
241
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company by
emailing expcac@ford.com.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
242
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
243
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
Website
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigationsindex-76.htm (English)
Website
www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetesindex-76.htm (French)
Phone
1–800–333–0510
Ford of Canada Contact Information
Website
www.ford.ca
Phone
1–800–565-3673
244
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
The power distribution box is located in
the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
If the battery has been disconnected and
reconnected, some features will need to
be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 269).
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
E190797
245
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse or relay number
Fuse amp rating
1
30A
2
-
3
Protected components
Panoramic moonroof.
Starter relay.
3
15A
4
—
5
20A
6
—
7
20A
1
8
20A
1
9
—
1
Rain sensor.
Blower motor relay.
3
Power point 3 - Back of console.
Not used.
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
1.
Powertrain control module power.
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
2.
Emission components.
Powertrain control module relay.
10
20A
11
15A
12
15A
13
10A
14
10A
15
—
16
20A
3
2
Power point 1 - driver front.
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
4.
Ignition coils.
2
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
3.
Non-emission components.
2
Not used.
2
Not used.
Run-start relay.
3
Power point 2 - console.
17
—
Not used.
18
—
Not used.
19
10A
20
10A
1
Run-start electronic power assist steering.
1
Adaptive cruise control.
246
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse or relay number
Fuse amp rating
21
15A
22
10A
23
15A
24
—
1
1
1
Protected components
Run/start transmission control.
Transmission oil pump start/stop.
Air conditioner clutch solenoid.
Run-start.
Blind spot information system.
Rear view camera.
Heads-up display.
Voltage stability module.
Gear shift actuator.
Not used.
25
2
10A
Run-start anti-lock brake system.
26
10A
2
Run-start powertrain control module.
27
—
Not used.
28
—
Not used.
29
5A
30
—
Not used.
31
—
Not used.
32
—
Electric fan 1 relay.
33
—
A/C clutch relay.
1
Mass air flow monitor.
34
—
Not used.
35
—
Not used.
36
—
Not used.
37
—
Not used.
38
—
Electric fan 2 relay.
39
—
Electric fan coil 2 and 3 relay.
40
—
Horn relay.
41
—
Not used.
42
—
Fuel pump coil relay.
247
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
1
Fuse or relay number
Fuse amp rating
Protected components
43
—
Not used.
44
—
Not used.
45
—
Not used.
46
—
Not used.
47
—
Not used.
48
—
Not used.
49
—
Not used.
50
20A
51
—
Not used.
52
—
Not used.
53
—
1
Horn.
10A
55
10A
Not used.
54
2
Brake on off switch.
2
ALT sensor.
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
M-type fuse.
Power Distribution Box - Bottom
There are fuses located on the bottom of
the fuse box. To access the bottom of the
fuse box, do the following:
248
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
1.
Release the two latches, located on
both sides of the fuse box.
2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box
from the cradle.
3. Move the fuse box toward the center
of the engine compartment.
4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box
to access the bottom side.
E145983
E190798
249
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse or relay number
Fuse amp rating
56
—
57
—
Not used.
Not used.
58
30A
59
30A
1
Fuel pump feed.
2
Electric fan 3 (1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L engines).
2
Electric fan 3 (3.0L engine).
2
Electric fan 1 (1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L engines).
2
Electric fan 1 (3.0L engine).
40A
60
30A
40A
61
Protected components
—
Not used.
62
2
50A
Body control module 1.
63
25A
1
Electric fan 2 (1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L engines).
1
Electric fan 2 (3.0L engine).
30A
64
—
Not used.
65
20A
66
—
67
50A
68
40A
69
30A
70
30A
71
—
72
20A
1
Trans oil pump.
73
20A
1
Rear heated seats.
74
30A
1
Driver seat module.
75
25A
1
Wiper motor 1.
1
Front heated seat.
Not used.
2
Body control module 2.
1
Heated rear window.
1
Anti-lock brake system valves.
1
Passenger seat.
Not used.
250
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse or relay number
Fuse amp rating
76
—
77
30A
78
—
1
Not used.
1
Climate control seat module.
Not used.
79
40A
80
25A
81
40A
82
–
2
Blower motor.
1
Wiper motor 2.
1
Inverter.
Not used.
83
20A
84
30A
85
—
86
–
87
Protected components
60A
1
TRCM shifter.
1
Starter solenoid.
Not used.
Not used.
2
Anti-lock brake system pump.
M-type fuse.
2
J-type fuse.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse
panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is located under the
instrument panel to the left of the steering
column.
251
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
E145984
Fuse or relay number
Fuse amp rating
Protected components
1
10A
2
7.5A
3
20A
4
5A
5
20A
6
10A
7
10A
8
10A
9
10A
10
5A
2
Keypad.
Cellphone passport module.
11
5A
2
Not used (spare).
1
Lighting (ambient, glove box, vanity, dome,
trunk).
1
Lumbar.
1
Driver door unlock.
Not used (spare).
1
1
Subwoofer amplifier.
2
Not Used (spare).
2
Not used (spare).
2
Not used (spare).
2
Not used (spare).
252
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse or relay number
Fuse amp rating
12
7.5A
13
7.5A
14
10A
15
10A
16
15A
17
5A
18
5A
19
7.5A
20
7.5A
21
5A
2
Humidity and in–car temperature sensor.
22
5A
2
Not Used (spare).
23
10A
24
20A
25
30A
26
30A
27
30A
28
20A
29
30A
30
30A
31
15A
2
2
Protected components
Climate control.
Gear shift
Steering wheel column lock.
Cluster.
Datalink logic.
2
Extended power module.
2
Datalink gateway module.
1
Child lock.
Decklid-liftglass release.
2
Not used (spare).
2
Push button stop start switch.
2
Extended power module.
2
Adaptive headlamp.
1
Delayed accessory (power inverter logic,
moonroof logic, driver master switch).
1
Central lock unlock.
1
Driver door (window, mirror).
1
Front passenger door (window, mirror).
1
Moonroof.
1
Amplifier.
1
Rear driver side door (window).
1
Rear passenger side door (window).
1
Not used (spare).
253
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
1
Fuse or relay number
Fuse amp rating
32
10A
33
20A
34
30A
35
5A
36
15A
37
20A
38
30A
1
1
1
Protected components
Global positioning system.
Display.
Voice control.
Radio frequency receiver.
Radio.
Active noise control.
Run-start bus (fuse 19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36,
37, circuit breaker).
Not used (spare).
1
1
1
Auto-dimming rear view mirror.
Continuous control damping suspension.
Rear heated seats.
Heated steering wheel.
Not used (spare).
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
254
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Callout
Fuse Type
A
Micro 2
B
Micro 3
C
Maxi
D
Mini
E
M Case
F
J Case
G
J Case Low Profile
255
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Working with the Engine On
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1.
Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•
•
•
•
Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
E142457
1.
Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand
side of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your
left-hand side.
Working with the Engine Off
1.
Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
256
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
4. Open the hood. Support the hood with
the strut.
Closing the Hood
1.
Remove the hood strut from the catch
and secure it correctly after use.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last 8-12
in (20-30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
E87786
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
E184600
257
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
A
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263).
B
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261).
C
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261).
D
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268).
E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269).
F
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 245).
G
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278).
H
Washer system fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
E159754
A
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263).
B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261).
C
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261).
258
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
D
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268).
E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269).
F
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 245).
G
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278).
H
Washer system fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L
E169801
A
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263).
B
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261).
C
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261).
D
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268).
E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269).
F
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 245).
259
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
G
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278).
H
Washer system fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
A
E188730
B
I
H
G
D
C
F
E
A
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263).
B
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268).
C
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269).
D
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 245).
E
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278).
F
Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 267).
G
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261).
H
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261).
I
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269).
260
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
1.
Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 256).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 257).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 330).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™
A
B
E199415
A
Minimum.
B
Maximum.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™/2.5L/2.7L
ECOBOOST™
A
B
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
E169062
A
Minimum.
B
Maximum.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,100 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL CHECK
WARNING
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
261
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
5. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC), comprised
of U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
From the main menu scroll to:
Message
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
Clean the area surrounding the engine oil
filler cap before you remove it.
1.
Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 257).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
2. Add engine oil that meets the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 330). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the oil level.
4. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Action and description
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Hold OK to Press and hold the OK
Reset
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
262
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Message
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We
recommend, Robinair® Coolant and
Battery Refractometer 75240 (Rotunda
tool part number: ROB75240). We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Action and description
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
Adding Coolant
WARNING
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant meeting the correct specification
in order to avoid plugging the small
passageways in the engine cooling system.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 330). Incorrect prediluted coolant
use can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 477).
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
1.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
263
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
Maintenance
2. Add prediluted coolant meeting the
correct specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 321).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
•
•
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Do not mix different colors or types of
prediluted coolant in your vehicle. Mixing
of prediluted coolant or using an incorrect
prediluted coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without prediluted
coolant in order to reach a vehicle service
location. On arrival do the following:
1. Drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system.
We recommend Motorcraft Premium
Cooling System Flush.
3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon
as possible.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40%
provides improved overheat protection.
Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Water alone, without prediluted coolant,
can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
264
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brine.
Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Maintenance
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the
coolant temperature gauge moves toward
the red zone:
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1.
Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
265
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
1.
WARNING
2.
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until
the coolant temperature reduces.
3.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach higher a
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
4.
5.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™/2.0L
ECOBOOST™/2.5L
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power.
In order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no need
to pull off the road. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 477). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips, shifts
slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking
fluid, contact an authorized dealer.
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
266
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
Maintenance
2. Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction. See Under Hood Overview
(page 260).
3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the cap and dipstick and remove it
again to check the fluid level.
4. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add
fluid immediately. See Adding
Transmission Fluid.
5. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™
WARNING
Do not use supplemental
transmission fluid additives,
treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in
damage to internal transmission
components.
The transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly you should check the fluid level. If
you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact
an authorized dealer.
Low Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the minimum
range (below point A) add the correct
specification fluid to be within the hash
mark area. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
Checking
the Transmission Fluid
*
Level
Only check the transmission fluid level
when the engine is at normal operating
temprature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C).
Normal operating temprature is reached
after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).
A
Note: If the fluid level is below the
minimum range do not drive your vehicle.
An underfill conition can damage the
transmission.
B
Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark
area (between points A and B) do not add
any fluid.
High Fluid Level
If the fluid level is above the maximum
range (above point B) fluid may need to
be removed. High fluid levels may be
caused by a overheating condition. If you
have operated your vehicle at high speeds,
towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot
weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a
minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking
the level.
E190273
A
Minimum
B
Maximum
Note: Check the fluid level with the engine
running and the transmission in park (P).
1.
Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
Note: An overfill conition can damage the
transmission.
267
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
*
Adding Transmission Fluid
1.
Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
*
direction.
x2
2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
3. Add fluid that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 340). Pour the
fluid directly into the automatic
transmission fluid cap and dipstick
hole.
4. Replace the cap and dipstick and
remove it again to check the fluid level.
5. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
6. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.
*
Vehicles With 2.7L EcoBoost
E190367
WARNING
1.
Do not run the engine with the air
filter disconnected.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the two air filter assembly
securing bolts.
Lift the air filter assembly to disengage
the locating pins.
Rotate the air filter assembly slightly
in a counterclockwise direction.
Check the fluid level. See Checking
the Transmission Fluid Level.
Install in reverse order. Tighten the two
air filter assembly securing bolts until
you feel a strong resistance.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating range;
there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid
levels are outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately.
268
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
Your vehicle has a Motorcraft®
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during
its life of service.
Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover
or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the
battery has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
When a low voltage battery replacement
is necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow
a technician to connect any electrical
device ground connection directly to the
low voltage battery negative post. A
connection at the low voltage battery
negative post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
269
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: If a person adds electrical or
electronic accessories or components to the
vehicle, the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
performance and durability and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 345). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 81).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 345).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, press
the accelerator pedal to start the
engine.
7. While the engine is running, press the
brake pedal and shift into neutral (N).
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km)
to completely relearn the idle and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required,
the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
that matches the electrical requirements
of the vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are
maintained by power from the low voltage
battery. Some engine computer settings,
like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,
optimize the driveability and performance
of the engine. Some other computer
settings, like the clock and radio station
presets, are also maintained in memory by
power from the low voltage battery. When
a technician disconnects and connects the
low voltage battery, these settings are
erased. Complete the following procedure
in order to restore the settings:
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
1.
With the vehicle at a complete stop,
set the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Fully press the brake pedal and start
the vehicle.
E142463
270
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, the
alignment of your headlamps should be
checked by your authorized dealer.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Headlamp Aiming Target
The wiper arms can be manually moved
when the ignition is off. This allows for ease
of blade replacement and cleaning under
the blades.
1
1
E142592
E129990
2
1.
Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass. Press the locking
buttons together.
2. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when the ignition is turned on.
8 feet (2.4 meters)
B
Center height of lamp to ground
C
25 feet (7.6 meters)
D
Horizontal reference line
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1.
Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
271
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
A
Maintenance
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E145594
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp. The horizontal edge of the
brighter light should touch the
horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
272
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
E159693
Note: To remove push pins, use a
flat-bladed screwdriver to pull up the center
release pin.
5. Remove the two screws securing the
headlamp using a flat-bladed
screwdriver.
1.
Make sure the headlamp control is in
the off position and open the hood.
2. Remove the six push pins securing the
front fascia to the front trim cover.
3. Remove the three bumper cover upper
screws using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
4. Remove the push pin at the inboard
side of the headlamp you are servicing.
E159695
6. Remove the lower three wheel housing
fasteners by turning them
counterclockwise.
E159694
273
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
9. From the front of the vehicle, gently
pull the front bumper cover forward 4
inches (10 centimeters) by grasping it
next to the headlamp to be serviced
and in the lower front of the wheel
opening.
E159696
7.
Remove the two outmost front bumper
cover lower fasteners, only on the side
of the headlamp you are servicing, by
turning them counterclockwise.
E159699
10.
11.
12.
Gently pull the headlamp assembly
outward to disengage it from the
lower fixing point.
Carefully lift the headlamp and
remove it from the vehicle.
Disconnect the electrical connector
from the headlamp assembly by
pushing the release tab on the
connector.
E159697
CHANGING A BULB
8. Separate the front bumper cover from
the fender by gently pulling the front
bumper cover to the outside of the
vehicle 1.2 inches (3 centimeters).
WARNINGS
Switch the lamps and the ignition off.
Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
Bulbs become hot when in use. Let
them cool down before you remove
them.
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 276).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
E159698
274
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Headlamp
A
The following lamps are LED:
• Front side marker lamps.
• Front direction indicators.
• Daytime running lamps.
• Side direction indicators.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Brake and rear lamps.
B
Reversing Lamp
1.
E222975
A
Headlamp high beam.
B
Headlamp low beam.
Carefully remove the luggage
compartment trim panel.
Note: LED headlamps are not serviceable.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Headlamp Low Beam
1. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Headlamp High Beam
1. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
E145779
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
275
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
1.
Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
E145780
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for
North America to make sure they have the
proper lamp performance, light brightness,
light pattern, and safe visibility. The correct
bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and
will provide quality bulb illumination time.
3. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb
counterclockwise to remove it.
License Plate Lamp
2
1
3
E72789
Function
Trade name
*Headlamp high beam (Halogen)
H7LL
*Headlamp low beam (Halogen)
H11LL
*Side marker lamp - front
LED
*Park lamp - front
W5W
*Turn lamp - front
PWY24W
*Fog lamp - front
H11
*Tail and brake lamp - high series
LED
*Tail and brake lamp - low series
LED
Reverse lamp
921
276
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Function
Trade name
*Turn lamp - rear - high series
LED
*Turn lamp - rear - low series
LED
*Side marker lamp - rear
LED
License plate lamp
W5W
*Trunk lamp
W5W or LED**
*High-mount brake lamp
LED
*Side repeater lamp
LED
*Interior lamp
LED
*To replace these bulbs, see your authorized dealer.
To replace all instrument panel bulbs, see your authorized dealer.
**If so equipped.
277
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
2.5L Engine
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
321).
E146047
1.
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
2.
3.
4.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 477).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
5.
EcoBoost Engines
6.
7.
E144365
278
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Release the clamps that secure the air
filter housing cover.
Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if not properly seated.
Install the air filter housing cover.
Engage the clamps to secure the air
filter housing cover to the air filter
housing.
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
Name
Specification
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
ZC-42
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
ZC-15
Motorcraft® Detail Wash
ESR-M14P4-A
ZC-3-A
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.)
ZC-20 (U.S.)
Engine Shampoo
Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner
ZC-56
Multi-Purpose Cleaner
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
WSS-M14P19-A
Bitterant (U.S.)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner
ZC-54
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.)
ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-A
ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner
ZC-37-A
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
to the touch, or during strong or direct
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
sunlight.
Detail Wash.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
279
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
•
•
•
Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
•
•
•
Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Exterior Chrome Parts
Underbody
•
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
•
•
Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
WAXING
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
•
•
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
•
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
280
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
Vehicle Care
•
•
•
Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
Do not apply wax to glass areas.
After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
•
•
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
281
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing.
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
collision.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 283).
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
•
•
•
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
•
If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
•
•
•
Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
282
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
283
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
General
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
•
•
•
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Body
•
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
•
•
•
•
Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
VEHICLE STORAGE
•
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
•
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
284
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
Protect from sunlight, if possible.
If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
Vehicle Care
•
•
Miscellaneous
With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
•
•
Fuel system
•
Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Tires
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
•
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
Cooling system
•
•
Protect against freezing temperatures.
When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
•
•
Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
•
Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Maintain recommended air pressure.
285
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE SEALANT AND INFLATOR
KIT (If Equipped)
Note: The temporary mobility kit contains
enough sealant compound in the canister
for one tire repair only. See your authorized
Ford dealer for replacement sealant
canisters.
The kit is located under the load floor in
the trunk. The kit consists of an air
compressor to re-inflate the tire and a
canister of sealing compound that will
effectively seal most punctures caused by
nails or similar objects. This kit will provide
a temporary tire repair allowing you to drive
your vehicle up to 120 mi (200 km) at a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to
reach a tire service location.
E175977
286
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
A
Air compressor (inside)
B
Selector switch
C
On and off button
D
Air pressure gauge
E
Sealant bottle and canister
F
Dual purpose hose: air and repair
G
Tire valve connector
H
Accessory power plug
I
Casing/housing
J
Bike/raft/sports ball adapters
Wheels and Tires
General Information
•
WARNING
•
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: Do not use the kit if a tire has become
severely damaged. Only punctures located
within the tire tread can be sealed with the
kit.
•
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger
than ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or damage to
the tire's sidewall. The tire may not
completely seal.
•
•
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect
tire performance. For this reason:
Note: Do not drive the vehicle above
50 mph (80 km/h).
•
•
Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi
(200 km). Drive only to the closest
authorized Ford dealer or tire repair shop to
have your tire inspected.
•
•
•
•
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers.
Periodically monitor tire inflation
pressure in the affected tire; if the tire
is losing pressure, have the vehicle
towed.
Read the information in the Tips for
Use of the Kit section to make sure safe
operation of the kit and your vehicle.
•
Tips for Use of the Kit
•
To ensure safe operation of the kit:
•
•
•
Read all instructions and cautions fully.
Before operating the kit, make sure
your vehicle is safely off the road and
away from moving traffic. Turn on the
hazard lights.
Always set the parking brake to ensure
the vehicle doesn't move unexpectedly.
•
287
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Do not remove any foreign objects,
such as nails or screws, from the tire.
When using the kit, leave the engine
running (only if the vehicle is outdoors
or in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor does not drain the
vehicle's battery.
Do not allow the compressor to
operate continuously for more than 15
minutes. This will help prevent the
compressor from overheating.
Never leave the kit unattended during
operation.
Sealant compound contains latex.
Those with latex sensitivities should
use appropriate precautions to avoid
an allergic reaction.
Keep the kit away from children.
Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F (-30°C)
and 158°F (70°C).
Only use the sealing compound before
the use-by date. The use-by date is on
a label on the sealant canister and can
be seen through the rectangular
viewing window on the bottom of the
compressor. Check the use-by date
regularly and replace the canister after
four years of non-use.
Do not store the kit unsecured inside
the passenger compartment of the
vehicle as it may cause injury during a
sudden stop or crash. Always store the
kit in its original location.
After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve
stem on the wheel must be replaced
by an authorized Ford dealer.
Operating the kit could cause an
electrical disturbance in radio, CD, and
DVD player operation.
Wheels and Tires
Sealant compound contains latex. Use
appropriate precautions to avoid any
allergic reactions.
* When inflation only is required
for a tire or other objects, the
selector must be in the Air
E175978
position.
Do not remove any foreign object that has
pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in
the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside
assistance.
What to do when a Tire Is
Punctured
1.
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the back of the compressor
housing.
3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve by
turning the connector clockwise.
Tighten the connection securely.
A tire puncture within the tire's tread area
can be repaired in two stages with the kit.
•
•
In the first stage, the tire will be
reinflated with a sealing compound
and air. After the tire has been inflated,
you will need to drive the vehicle a
short distance (about 4 miles [6
kilometers]) to distribute the sealant
in the tire.
In the second stage, you will need to
check the tire pressure and adjust, if
necessary, to the vehicle's specified
tire inflation pressure.
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire
with Sealing Compound and Air
WARNINGS
Do not stand directly over the kit
while inflating the tire. If you notice
any unusual bulges or deformations
in the tire's sidewall during inflation, stop
and call roadside assistance.
If the tire does not inflate to the
recommended tire pressure within
15 minutes, stop and call roadside
assistance.
Do not run the engine during kit
operation unless the vehicle is
outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.
Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level
and secure area, away from moving traffic.
E175979
Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking
brake and turn the engine off. Inspect the
flat tire for visible damage.
4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt
power point in the vehicle.
288
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
pressure gauge reading will indicate
the tire inflation pressure after about
30 seconds of operation. The final tire
pressure should be checked with the
compressor turned OFF in order to get
an accurate pressure reading.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on
the casing/housing and place it on the
top of the instrument panel or the
center of the dash.
6. Start the vehicle leave the engine
running so the compressor does not
drain the vehicle’s battery.
E175982
E175981
9. When the recommended tire pressure
is reached, turn off the kit, unplug the
power cable, and disconnect the hose
from the tire valve. Re-install the valve
cap on the tire valve and return the kit
to the stowage area.
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the
vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to
distribute the sealant evenly inside
the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80
km/h).
11.
After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and
check the tire pressure. See Second
stage: Checking tire pressure.
7.
Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealant
position. Turn the kit on by pressing the
on/off button (B).
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on
the tire label located on the driver's
door or the door jamb area. The initial
air pressure gauge reading may indicate
a value higher than the label pressure
while the sealing compound is being
pumped into the tire. This is normal and
should be no reason for concern. The
289
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
4. If required, turn on the compressor and
adjust the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure shown on the tire
label located on the driver's door or
door jamb area. The tire pressure
should be checked with the
compressor turned OFF in order to get
an accurate pressure reading.
5. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve
cap on the tire and return the kit to the
stowage area.
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise while
driving, reduce your speed until you can
safely pull off to the side of the road to call
for roadside assistance. Note: Do not
proceed to the second stage of this
operation.
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure
WARNINGS
If you are proceeding from the First
Stage: Re-inflating the Tire with
Sealing Compound and Air section
and have injected sealant in the tire and
the pressure is below 20 psi (1.4 bar),
continue to the next step.
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, you will
need to replace the sealant canister.
Sealant canisters and spare parts can be
obtained at an authorized Ford dealer.
Empty sealant canisters may be disposed
of at home. However, canisters still
containing liquid sealant should be
disposed of by your local authorized Ford
dealer or tire dealer, or in accordance with
local waste disposal regulation.
The power plug may get hot after use
and should be handled carefully
while unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:
Note: After the sealing compound has been
used, the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h) and the maximum driving
distance is 120 mi (200 km). The sealed tire
should be inspected immediately.
You can check the tire pressure any time
within the 120 mi (200 km) by performing
the steps listed previously in the Second
stage: Checking Tire Pressure procedure.
E175983
1.
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Firmly screw the air compressor hose
onto the valve stem by turning
clockwise.
3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the
air position.
290
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Removal of the sealant canister from
the kit
E175987
4. Rotate the sealant canister up 90
degrees and pull away from
casing/housing to remove.
E175984
1.
Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the compressor housing.
Installation of the sealant canister to
the kit
1.
With the canister held perpendicular
to the housing, insert the canister
nozzle into the connector and push
until seated.
2. Rotate the canister 90 degrees down
into the housing/casing.
E175985
2. Unwrap the power cord.
E175988
3. Snap the back cover back into place.
E175986
3. Remove the back cover.
291
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Important information for
235/40R19 low-profile tires
and wheels If your vehicle is
equipped with 235/40R19 tires,
they are low-profile tires. These
tires and wheels are designed to
give your vehicle a sport
appearance. With low-profile tires,
you may notice an increase in road
noise and faster tire wear,
depending on road conditions and
driving styles. Due to their design,
low-profile tires and wheels are
more prone to road damage from
potholes, rough or unpaved roads,
car wash rails and curb contact
than standard tires and wheels.
Note: Your vehicle’s warranty does
not cover these types of damage.
Tires should always be kept at the
correct inflation pressures and
extra caution should be taken when
operating on rough roads to avoid
impacts that could cause wheel
and tire damage.
E175989
4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) around the channel on the
bottom of the housing/casing.
E175990
5. Wrap the power cord around the
housing and stow the accessory power
plug into its storage area.
Note: If you experience any difficulties with
the removal or installation of the sealant
canister, consult your authorized Ford dealer
for assistance.
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
Be sure to check the sealant compound’s
use-by date regularly. The use-by date is
on a label located on the sealant canister
and can be seen through the rectangular
viewing window on the bottom of the kit.
The sealant canister should be replaced
after four years of non-use.
E142542
292
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 ©)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1 ½ times as well on
293
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
* Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
294
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
*B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door
* Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
* Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information on P Type Tires
C D
B
F
G
H
A
I
J
M
L
K
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
295
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
E
Wheels and Tires
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph (130
km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).
These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
296
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Letter
rating
mph ( km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
Wheels and Tires
Letter
rating
mph ( km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. Refer to the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
297
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load,
radial tubeless, etc.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
B
A
D
E142544
B
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
298
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
C
Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
B
A
C
D
E
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
299
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver’s door.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
300
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. Failure to
follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
301
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, (see the Dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store
and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for
a description. Store and maintain
at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
302
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Tire Wear
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters)
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
Damage
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
303
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
WARNINGS
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these
labels then you should contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
304
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing,
your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your TPMS, or
some component of the TPMS
may be damaged.
WARNINGS
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet
(3.66 meters) away from the
wheel and tire assembly.
Safety Practices
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 35 mph (56 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
For a mounting pressure more
than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the
person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters)
away from the wheel and tire
assembly
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
305
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
306
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life.
Front-wheel drive and all-wheel
drive vehicles (front tires on the
left side of the diagram)
All vehicles with directional tires
(front tires on the left side of the
diagram)
E147237
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
Summer Tires
Your Ford vehicle may be
equipped with summer tires to
provide superior performance on
wet and dry roads. Summer tires
do not have the Mud and Snow
(M+S or M/S) tire traction rating
on the tire side wall. Since
summer tires do not have the
same traction performance as
All-season or Snow tires, Ford
does not recommend using
summer tires when temperatures
drop to approximately 45°F (7°C)
or below (depending on tire wear
and environmental conditions) or
in snow and ice conditions. Like
any tire, summer tire performance
E142547
307
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
is affected by tire wear and
environmental conditions. If you
must drive in those conditions,
Ford recommends using Mud and
Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or
Snow tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
USING SUMMER TIRES
Summer tires provide superior
performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud and
Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on
the tire side wall. Since summer tires do
not have the same traction performance
as All-season or Snow tires, we do not
recommend using summer tires when
temperatures drop to approximately 45°F
(7°C) or below (depending on tire wear
and environmental conditions) or in snow
and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer
tire performance is affected by tire wear
and environmental conditions. If you must
drive in those conditions, we recommend
using Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S),
All-season or Snow tires.
The tires on your vehicle may have
all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates,
you may need to use snow tires and cables.
If you need to use cables, it is
recommended that steel wheels (of the
same size and specifications) be used, as
cables may chip aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices
Always store your summer tires indoors at
temperatures above 20ºF (-7ºC). The
rubber compounds used in these tires lose
flexibility and may develop surface cracks
in the tread area at temperatures below
20ºF (-7ºC). If the tires have been
subjected to 20ºF (-7ºC) or less, warm
them in a heated space to at least 40ºF
(5ºC) for at least 24 hours before installing
them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle
with the tires installed, or checking tire
inflation. Do not place tires near heaters
or heating devices used to warm the room
where the tires are stored. Do not apply
heat or blow heated air directly on the tires.
Always inspect the tires after storage
periods and before use.
•
•
•
•
•
308
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
Use no larger than 15 mm cables or
chains ONLY on front axle with
215/60R16 tires. Do not use chains or
cables on any other size tires.
The snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the front axle.
When driving with tire cables do not
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
Wheels and Tires
•
•
Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
vehicle damage.
Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on
dry roads.
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically
(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure
to properly maintain your tire pressure
could increase the risk of tire failure, loss
of control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
309
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
E142549
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
310
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure
warning light
Possible cause
Customer action required
Solid warning light
Tire(s) under-inflated
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Spare tire in use
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Spare tire in use
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Flashing warning
light
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
311
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure value
may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one
or more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive
the vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the
tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 309). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
an authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 309).
312
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Important Use of Spare Wheel
•
•
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
*
1. T-type mini-spare.
Driving With a Full-size Dissimilar Spare
Wheel and Tire Assembly
Do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
**
wheel.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel.
*
This spare tire begins with the letter T for
tire size and may have Temporary Use Only
molded in the sidewall.
**
This spare tire has a label on the wheel
that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
Use of the above dissimilar spare wheel at
any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
Driving with a T-type Mini-spare or Fullsize Dissimilar Spare With Label on Wheel
Do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Give additional caution to the following
when driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Use of the above dissimilar spare wheel at
any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
313
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wet weather driving capability.
All-wheel driving capability (if
applicable).
Wheels and Tires
Changing a Road Wheel Procedure
(If Equipped)
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P).
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P), set the parking brake and block (in
both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of
the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
E175447
3. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.
For example, if the left front tire is flat,
block the right rear wheel.
4. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.
5. Remove the spare tire bolt securing the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Remove the spare tire from the spare
tire compartment.
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If your
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
E178186
1.
Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, place the
transmission in reverse ®) after the
engine is turned off.
7.
314
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Remove the lug wrench and jack from
the spare tire compartment.
Wheels and Tires
E145908
11.
E175694
8. To remove the wrench from the jack,
turn the hex nut on the jack
counterclockwise. This will lower the
jack and loosen the mechanical lock.
The vehicle jacking points are shown
here, and can be identified by the
triangle markings on the molding. The
triangle marking may be located on
the side or the underside of the
molding. The jacking points are
identified on vehicles without
moldings by a pair of arrows on the
metal flange pointing to the jacking
point between them. Details are
depicted on the warning label on the
jack.
E224246
E174939
9. If your vehicle has a wheel trim, use the
tool supplied to remove it and access
the lug nuts.
10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
12.
13.
315
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Place the jack at the jacking point
next to the tire you are changing. Turn
the jack handle clockwise until the
wheel is completely off the ground.
Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Wheels and Tires
14.
15.
Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered. If
you are using the temporary tire, the
lug nut washers will not appear to be
flush with the rim. This is normal only
when using the temporary spare tire.
Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
4
3
5
2
E75442
16.
E176165
316
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
319).
Wheels and Tires
17.
18.
19.
3. Install the shorter jack retainer bolt to
the jack bolt-down bracket through the
centre of the wheel. Finally, wind the
wheel retainer down to secure the
wheel in place.
4. Place the jack and tools back into the
spare tire compartment.
5. Replace the carpeted wheel cover.
To store the folded wrench on the
jack, engage the bracket of the jack
base on the wrench feature as shown.
Swing the wrench upward and adjust
the height of the jack until the pin
engages the hole. Tighten the hex nut
clockwise by hand until secure.
Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench
away. Make sure the jack is fastened
securely before you drive.
Unblock the wheel.
Stowing the Flat Tire Using the
Retainer Strap (If Equipped)
You can temporarily stow the full-size road
wheel in the spare tire compartment.
Stowing the Flat Tire
1.
Find the flat tire retainer strap tucked
inside the jack channel.
E224480
2. Locate the jack bolt-down bracket.
Push the retainer strap through the jack
bolt-down bracket.
3. Put the jack and lug wrench away.
Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
4. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the
cargo area.
5. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
E227869
You can temporarily stow the full-size road
wheel in the spare tire compartment.
1.
Lift the carpeted wheel cover at an
angle to access the spare tire
compartment.
2. Place the wheel in the spare tire well
with the valve stem facing down.
317
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
6. Secure the flat tire by tying a flat knot.
E224479
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™/2.0L
ECOBOOST™/2.5L
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Bolt size
Ib-ft (Nm)
M12 x 1.5
100 (135)
*
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
318
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
Wheel pilot bore.
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
E145950
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Bolt size
Ib-ft (Nm)
M14 x 1.5
150 (204)
*
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
319
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
A
Wheel pilot bore.
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
320
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Engine
1.5L EcoBoost engine
Cubic inches
92
Firing order
1-3-4-2
Compression ratio
10.0:1
Spark plug gap
0.025-0.029 in. (0.65-0.75 mm)
Ignition system
Coil on plug
Drivebelt Routing
E167586
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Engine
2.0L EcoBoost engine
Cubic inches
122
Firing order
1-3-4-2
Compression ratio
9.3:1
Spark plug gap
0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80 mm)
Ignition system
Coil on plug
321
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
A. Long drivebelt is on first pulley groove
closest to engine
B. Short drivebelt is on second pulley
groove farthest from engine
A
B
E161383
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L
Engine
2.5L engine
Cubic inches
152
Firing order
1-3-4-2
Compression ratio
9.7:1
Spark plug gap
0.049-0.053 in. (1.25-1.35 mm)
Ignition system
Coil on plug
A. Long drivebelt is on first pulley groove
closest to engine
B. Short drivebelt is on second pulley
groove farthest from engine
Drivebelt Routing
A
B
E161383
322
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Measurement
Specification
Cubic inches
164
Firing order
1-4-2-5-3-6
Ignition system
Coil in plug
Compression ratio
10.0:1
Spark plug gap
0.028–0.031 in (0.7–0.8 mm)
Drivebelt Routing
E176088
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Component
Motorcraft Part number
Air filter element
FA-1912
Oil filter
FL-910S
Battery
BXT-90T5-500
*
BXT-90T5-590
BAGM-48H6-760
**
Spark plugs
SP-539
Cabin air filter
FP-71
Windshield wiper blade
WW-2601 (driver side)
323
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Component
Motorcraft Part number
WW-2700 (passenger side)
*
This part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access.
**
This part is designed for vehicles with Automatic-Start-Stop.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477).
324
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Component
Motorcraft Part number
Air filter element
FA-1912
Oil filter
FL-910S
Battery
BXT-90T5-590
Spark plugs
SP-537
Cabin air filter
FP-71
Windshield wiper blade
WW-2601 (driver side)
WW-2700 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477).
325
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.5L
Component
Motorcraft Part number
Air filter element
FA-1912
Oil filter
FL-910S
Battery
BXT-90T5-500
*
BXT-90T5-590
*
Spark plugs
SP-530
Cabin air filter
FP-71
Windshield wiper blade
WW-2601 (driver side)
WW-2700 (passenger side)
This part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477).
326
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Component
Motorcraft Part number
Air filter element.
FA-1912
Oil filter.
FL-2062
Battery.
BXT-94RH7-730
Spark plugs.
SP-542
Cabin air filter.
FP-71
Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2601 (driver side)
WW-2700 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft® replacement
parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance.
These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are
engineered for your vehicle. Use of other
parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty
may be void for any damage related to use
of other parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available,
use an oil filter that meets industry
performance specification
SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs
at the appropriate intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 477).
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
327
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E142477
A
World manufacturer identifier
B
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
C
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D
Engine type
E
Check digit
F
Model year
G
Assembly plant
H
Production sequence number
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
328
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
Description
Code
Six-speed automatic transmission (6FMR).
W
Six-speed automatic transmission (6F55).
C
329
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item
Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter).
4.3 qt (4.1 L)
Engine coolant.
10.9 qt (10.3 L)
Brake fluid.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Automatic transmission fluid.
9.0 qt (8.5 L)
Windshield washer fluid.
Fill as required
Fuel tank.
16.5 gal (62.5 L)
A/C refrigerant.
18 oz (0.51 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
*
*
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C945-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-A
Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-A
Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C945-A
330
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
Optional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M2C945-A
Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
CXT-10-LV12
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-A
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M14P19-A
A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-AA
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSS-M17B21-A
331
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSS-M2C300-A2
Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--
Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--
Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
--
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
E142732
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
332
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item
Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter).
5.7 qt (5.4 L)
Engine coolant.
8.5 qt (8 L)
Brake fluid.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid.
2.4 pt (1.15 L)
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive).
Automatic transmission fluid.
9.0 qt (8.5 L)
Windshield washer fluid.
Fill as required
Fuel tank (Front Wheel Drive).
*
16.5 gal (62.5 L)
Fuel tank (All Wheel Drive).
18 gal (68.1 L)
A/C refrigerant.
22 oz (0.62 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
*
11.8 fl oz (0.35 L)
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
333
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-A
Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-A
Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-A
Optional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M2C946-A
Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
334
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
CXT-10-LV12
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-A
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M14P19-A
A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-AA
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSS-M2C300-A2
Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--
Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--
Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
--
335
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
E142732
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
336
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Item
Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter).
5.7 qt (5.4 L)
Engine coolant.
7.8 qt (7.4 L)
Brake fluid.
*
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Automatic transmission fluid.
9.0 qt (8.5 L)
Windshield washer fluid.
Fill as required
*
Fuel tank.
16.5 gal (62.5 L)
A/C refrigerant.
24 oz (0.68 kg)
A/C refrigerant (E100 engines).
22 oz (0.62 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C945-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-A
Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-A
Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
WSS-M2C945-A
Optional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M2C945-A
Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
WSS-M97B44-D2
337
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
VC-3DIL-B
Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
CXT-10-LV12
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-A
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M14P19-A
A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-AA
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
WSS-M2C300-A2
338
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--
Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--
Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
--
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
E142732
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
339
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item
Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter).
6.0 qt (5.7 L)
Engine coolant.
11.4 qt (10.8 L)
Brake fluid.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive).
16.0–20.8 fl oz (473–615 ml)
Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive).
15.2 fl oz (450 ml)*
Automatic transmission fluid.
11.6 qt (11 L)**
Windshield washer fluid.
Fill as required
Fuel tank.
18 gal (68.1 L)
A/C refrigerant.
18 oz (0.51 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)
*Contact an authorized dealer for fluid level checking and filling.
**Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
340
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Recommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-A
Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-A
Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-A
Optional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M2C946-A
Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico): WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada):
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
341
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and
WSL-M2C192-A
Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada)
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
CXT-10-LV12
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-A
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M14P19-A
A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-AA
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSS-M2C300-A2
Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
ESB-M1C93-B
342
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--
Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--
Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
--
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
E142732
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
343
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
344
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
Radio Reception Factors
Distance and strength
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in
Ford CD players.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
345
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
•
•
MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
346
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
E185815
A
VOL and Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
B
CD slot: Insert a CD.
C
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency in individual increments.
D
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency and press this button. The system stops
at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to
the next strong radio station. In CD mode, press this button to select the next
track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward through the current
track.
E
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
F
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency and press this button. The system stops
at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
to the previous strong radio station. In CD mode, press this button to select the
previous track. Press and hold the button to move quickly backward through
the current track.
347
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
RADIO
Note: Some features, such as Sirius satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E144488
348
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
A
CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
B
SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings.
When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change
the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set
for each audio source independently.
C
Display screen: Shows audio and SYNC information.
D
Number block: In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access.
When tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttons
to enter a phone number.
E
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
F
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.
G
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
H
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system
stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
to the next strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press this button
to select the next track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward
through the current track.
I
End phone call: Press this button to end a phone call.
J
Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
K
CD slot: Insert a CD.
L
Pick-up or Make phone call: Press this button to either pick-up an incoming
phone call or to make a phone call.
M
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system
stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move
quickly to the previous strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press
this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move
quickly backward through the current track.
N
Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause a track when listening to a CD.
O
VOL and Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
P
PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC® system.
See SYNC™ (page 360).
Q
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu
Structure later in this section.
349
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
R
MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
S
Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and minutes. You can also set the clock by pressing
the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings.
T
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies
bands. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different
radio functions.
U
SIRIUS or MUTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Sirius satellite radio, press
this button to listen to Sirius satellite radio. If your vehicle is not equipped with
Sirius satellite radio, press the button to mute the playing media.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
350
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
E207196
A
SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance.
B
CD slot: Insert a CD.
C
Eject: Press to eject a CD.
D
TUNE: In radio mode, adjust to manually search through the radio frequency
band.
E
VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
F
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In CD mode, press to select the next or previous track. Press and hold
to move quickly forward or backward through the current track.
Menu Structure
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press MENU.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
351
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Radio
Manual tune
Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the
frequency band.
Scan
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.
AST
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AMAST and FM-AST frequency bands.
PTY/Set Category
Select to have the system search by certain music
categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
RBDS/RDS
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.
SIRIUS
Scan
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.
Show ESN
Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN). You will need this number when communicating
with Sirius to activate, modify or track your account.
Channel Guide
Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK
to open a list of the following options for this channel:
Tune Channel, Skip Channel or Lock Channel. Once you
skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by pressing
Direct and entering the channel number. Locking or
unlocking a channel requires your PIN.
Set Category
Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or
News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions
only stop on channels in that category.
Alerts
Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs, artists or
teams. The system alerts you when the selection is playing
on another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.
Unlock All Stations
Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.
Skip No stations
Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.
Parental Lock (PIN)
Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock
channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
352
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Audio Settings
Speed Compensated
Volume
Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between
0 and +7.
Sound
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.
Occupancy Mode
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.
RBDS/RDS Text
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.
DSP
Choose between the stereo modes.
CD Settings
Scan All
Select to scan all disc selections.
Scan Folder
Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.
CD Compression
Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
Set Time
Select to set the time.
Set Date
Select to set the calendar date.
24h Mode
Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.
Clock Settings
Display Settings
Dimming
Select to change display brightness.
Language
Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.
Temp. setting
Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
353
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
354
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Reception area
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Station blending
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
355
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Potential station issues
Issues
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Cause
Action
This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
by the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out.
analog and digital audio.
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
*
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
The previously stored
No action required. The
multicast preset or direct
station is not available in
tune is not available in your your current location.
current reception area.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
There is no text information Data service issue by the
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster.
frequency.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables
when Scan is pressed.
HD2-HD7 channel search.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
below.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
356
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence
interference and the audio system may mute.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
E142593
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
357
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Troubleshooting
Message
Condition
Action
Acquiring…
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Satellite antenna fault
There is an internal module If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present.
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
SIRIUS system failure
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Invalid Channel
The channel is no longer
available.
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle
antenna.
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
Updating…
Update of channel
programming in progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Questions? Call
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
1-888-539-7474
None found
Check Channel Guide
Subscription Updated
All the channels in the
Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
skipped or locked.
function on that station.
SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
358
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
No action required.
Audio System
USB PORT (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E211463
See your SYNC information.
E205592
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)
You can locate the media hub inside the
center console or on the instrument panel.
359
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
•
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist and applications, such
as Spotify and Glympse, via SYNC
*
AppLink.
•
•
•
•
Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*
These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
Stream music from your connected
phone.
Text message.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
360
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Privacy Information
Driving Restrictions
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
361
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 376).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
(cancel | exit)
This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
help
This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
(main menu | start again)
This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
•
Helpful Hints
•
•
Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
•
362
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
SYNC™
System Interaction and Feedback
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
E142599
Voice Command
Action and Description
voice settings
Then either of the following:
interaction mode novice
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
interaction mode advanced
Provides less audible interaction and guidance.
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Voice Command
Action and Description
voice settings
Then either of the following:
confirmation prompts off
Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
confirmation prompts on
Clarify your voice command with a short
question.
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
363
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Voice Command
Action and Description
voice settings
Then any of the following:
phone confirmation on
When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
phone confirmation off
The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
•
•
Changing the Voice Settings
In addition to using voice commands to
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
To change the voice settings press the
Menu button then select:
Menu Item
SYNC-Settings
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Voice settings
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 4000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
364
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Call waiting notification.
Caller ID.
SYNC™
1.
Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the
audio display indicates there is no
paired phone, select the option to add.
3. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing
process.
4. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
Press the voice and when prompted
say:
Voice Command
Action and Description
(pair ([Bluetooth]
device | phone |
Bluetooth audio) |
add phone)
Follow the instructions on the audio
display.
You can say any of the voice commands
that appear within open and close brackets
that are separated by |. For example,
where; (what's | what is) appears you say;
what's or what is.
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Using Voice Commands
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
E142599
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1.
Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth
Devices.
4. Press the OK button.
365
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
7. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
Voice Command
2
join (calls | call)
2
mute call [on]
2
(mute call off | un-mute call)
2
(turn ringer on | silent mode off)
(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
[text] (messages | message)
3
help
SYNC may prompt you with more cell
phone options. Your cell phone may also
prompt you to give SYNC permission to
access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your
cell phone’s manual and visit the website.
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Home".
1
See Dial table below.
2
These commands are only valid while in
a phone call.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
(hold call [on] | place call on hold)
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say any of the
following:
3
See the text message table below.
Dial Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
Voice Command
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)
Voice Commands
Then say any of the following:
411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)
call (___)
700 (seven hundred)
call ___ at home
800 (eight hundred)
call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)
900 (nine hundred)
call ___ on (cell | mobile)
Clear (deletes all entered digits)
call ___ on other
dial [[a] number]
1
([go to] privacy | transfer to phone
| privacy on)
2
Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
Number <0-9>
366
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Commands
Voice Command
Plus
(connect |
device) ___
Pound (#)
Star (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press any button on the
audio system.
You can state the name of
the desired device, such as
“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy”
or“My iPod”. SYNC may
ask you to confirm the type
of device (Phone, USB, or
Bluetooth Audio).
Making Calls
To access text messages say:
Voice Command
[text] (messages | message)
E142599
Then say any of the following:
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
(listen to | read) ([text] message)
Voice Command
forward (text | [text] message)
call [[a]
name]
reply to (text | [text] message)
call [sender]
dial [[a]
number]
Phonebook Hints
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name browse phonebook, select a contact
and press:
SYNC prompts you to say
the numbers that you wish
to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system
confirms it. You can then
say:
Menu Item
When the system has stated the
number, you say any of the following:
Hear it
Voice Command
(dial | send) This initiates the call.
Changing Devices Using Voice
Commands
(delete |
correct)
Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple
phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch
devices say:
To end the call, press the end call button
on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display.
367
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
This erases the spoken
digits.
SYNC™
Receiving Calls
To use the screen to reject a call select:
Accepting calls
Menu Item
When receiving a call, you can answer the
call by pressing the accept call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
Reject
Ignore the call by doing nothing.
To use the screen to accept a call
select:
Phone Options during an Active
Call
Menu Item
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, such as
putting a call on hold or joining calls.
Accept
Rejecting Calls
To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
from the following options:
When receiving a call, you can reject the
call by pressing the reject call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
Menu Item
Description and action
Mic. off
Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the
microphone on, select the option again.
Privacy
Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Hold
Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.
Dial a number
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).
Join calls
Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Phonebook
Access your phonebook contacts.
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
368
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Menu Item
Description and action
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Call History
Access your call history log.
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
1.
Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
Display
Description and action
Dial a number
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.
Phonebook
Access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Call History
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Speed Dial
Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
369
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Display
Description and action
Text messaging
Send, download and delete text messages.
BT Devices
Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
Phone settings
View various settings and features on your phone.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3.1 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the audio display
indicates you have a new message.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
To hear the message you can say:
Voice command
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
Your phone must support downloading text
messages using Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
(listen to | read)
([text] message)
Description and
action
Select this option
to have the system
read the message
to you.
Using the screen you also have the following options:
Menu
Item
Description and action
Ignore
Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
View
Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
More...
If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
370
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Menu
Item
Description and action
Reply to
sender
Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Call sender
Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Forward
msg.
Press the OK button to forward the message to
anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
2. Select the text messaging option, and
then press the OK button.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
1.
Press the PHONE button.
Choose from the following options:
Menu
Item
Description and action
New
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15
messages.
View
Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to
have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select
the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or
forward the message.
Delete
Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular
phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your
text messages.
More...
Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all
unread messages from your cellular phone.
3. Press the OK button again to confirm
when the system asks if you want to
send the message. A pre-defined
signature appears on each text
message.
Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
and selecting the text option from the audio
display or by replying to a received message
in the inbox.
Sending a Text Message
Note: You can only send a text message to
one recipient at a time.
1.
Select the send option when the
desired selection highlights in the audio
display.
2. Select the confirmation option when
the contact appears.
371
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Accessing Your Phone Settings
phonebook, and set up automatic
download.
These are phone-dependent features. Your
phone settings allow you to access and
adjust features such as your ring tone and
text message notification, modify your
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.
Scroll to select from the following options:
Menu Item
Description and action
Set as master
If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.
Phone status
See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Set ringtone
Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.
Text msg notify
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to
switch the audible tone off or on.
Phonebook pref.
Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.
372
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Menu Item
Phonebook preferences
Add contacts
Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Delete
When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.
Download now
Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook to the system.
Auto-download
When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phonedependent and quantity-dependent.
Sorting Pref.
Enabling this feature allows you to select how your
contacts are displayed. You can select:
First/Last name
Last/First name
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
and then press the OK button.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
Select from the following options:
Menu Item
Add
Description and action
Pair additional phones to the system.
1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
373
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Menu Item
Description and action
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm
that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted
to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
screen. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.
Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC
permission to access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s
manual and visit the website.
Delete
Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.
Master
The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.
Conn.
Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's functionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.
Discon.
Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and
then press the OK button.
System Settings
1.
Press the MENU button.
374
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Scroll to select from the following options:
Display
Description and action
Bluetooth on
Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's
Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.
Set defaults
Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Master reset
Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.
Install on SYNC
Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.
System info
Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.
Voice settings
The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 362).
Browse USB
Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.
375
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
In order for the following features to work,
your cellular phone must be compatible
with SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications such as
Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is
compatible).
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
911 Assist
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 39). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 231).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
376
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Setting 911 Assist On or Off
•
Press Menu then select
Menu
Item
•
Action and Description
SYNC-Applications
911 Assist Select desired option, on or
off.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.
If you choose not to activate this
feature you will have the following
options:
Menu
Item
Action and Description
Voice
Provides a display and voice
Reminder reminder at phone connection
ON
at vehicle start.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".
Voice
Provides a display reminder
Reminder only without a voice reminder
OFF
at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•
377
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
SYNC™
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
Note: AppLink is not available if your
vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
system.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the
menu on-screen. Then select:
SYNC Mobile Apps
Menu
Item
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Action and Description
SYNC-Apps
Mobile
Apps
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
select a particular app or
select:
Find New Apps
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.
Accessing an App's Menu
When an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
wheel control to access the app menu.
Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps
will vary by region.
You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.
378
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
mobile (apps |
applications)
help
Use this command to discover the available voice commands.
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:
Menu Item
Action and Description
mobile (apps | applications)
SYNC prompts you to say the name of an
app to start it on SYNC.
list [mobile] (apps | applications)
SYNC lists all of the currently available
mobile apps.
find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications)
Searches your connected mobile device for
SYNC-compatible mobile apps.
help
You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.
379
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
•
•
To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:
Menu Item
Action and Description
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
All Apps
You can also select a specific app.
If the app supports push notifications, this
setting is listed. Select to enable or disable
the feature as required.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.
App Status
You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.
380
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
There are three possible statuses:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Update Needed
The system has detected a new app
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Up-To-Date
No update is required.
Updating...
The system is trying to receive an update.
Update settings
Menu Item
Action and Description
Request Update
Select this option from the settings menu
to manually preform a needed update.
Disable Updates
Select this option from the settings menu
to disable automatic updates.
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile
Apps on SYNC.
Confirm that the USB device has been
formatted correctly and has the following
specifications:
• USB 2.0.
• File format must be FAT16/32.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album.
The format of the audio files on the USB
device must be:
• MP3.
• Non DRM protected WMA.
• WAV.
• AAC.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 15,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod, Zune,
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats,
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
381
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
To Connect Using Voice Commands
To Connect Using the System Menu
Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.
1.
Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.
2. Press the MEDIA button and select
either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media
source list in the audio display.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say:
Voice Command
Action and Description
(USB [stick] | iPod
| MP3 [player])
You can now play
music by saying any
of the appropriate
voice commands.
See the media
voice commands.
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do
not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example,
for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3
[player]) appears, you can say USB or USB
stick.
To view USB content select:
Message
Browse USB
Description and Action
Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback
audio automatically.
Message
You can browse the files on the USB
device in categories. Select BROWSE
from the buttons at the bottom of the
audio display and choose from the
following:
Albums
Genres
Browse USB
Message
Reset USB
Play all
Media Voice Commands
Playlists
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Songs
E142599
Artists
382
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Command
Description and Action
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player])
voice commands.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or
"what is playing".
Command
pause
play
Description and Action
Pauses device playback.
Resumes device playback.
play [album] ___
play all
Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
next [track | title | song | file | podcast |
chapter | episode]
Plays the next track on the current media.
previous [track | title | song | file |
podcast | chapter | episode]
Plays the previous track on current media.
[play] (similar music | more like this)
Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the
one currently playing.
play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
repeat (one | track) [on]
Repeats the current track.
383
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Command
Description and Action
shuffle [all] [on]
Plays the current playlist in a random order.
(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle off
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
At any time during playback, you can press
the voice button and ask the system what is
playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(if populated) of the current track.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:
Examples of USB Commands
Bluetooth Audio
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
ways to find and play a song using voice.
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
The system is also capable of playing
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth.
•
•
•
•
Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the
MEDIA button (next to the audio display)
or Source button, or press the voice button
and when prompted say:
Play song "Penny Lane".
Play "Penny Lane".
Voice Command
Bluetooth audio
Then any of the following:
Voice Command
pause
play
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
384
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Media Menu Features
reset the index of your USB devices.
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
Press the MEDIA button and select either
USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list
in the audio display to start USB playback.
Message
Options
Description and Action
This will enter the media menu.
Then any of the following:
Message
Description and Action
Shuffle
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Similar music
You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Reset USB
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the
audio display) to select USB playback.
Accessing Your USB Song Library
1.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Message
Browse USB
Description and Action
This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
385
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
If there are no media files to access, the
display indicates there is no media.
If there are media files, you have the following options:
Display
Play all
Description and Action
Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
*
in numerical order.
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Playlists
Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
*
or MTP).
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Songs
Search for and play a specific indexed track.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Artists
Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
*
*
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Albums
Sort all indexed media files by album.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Genres
Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse USB
Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
1. Press the OK button to select.
*
*
386
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Display
Description and Action
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and
then press the OK button.
Reset USB
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
USB 2 (If Equipped)
Using Voice Commands
Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.
You can access and view your USB songs
using voice commands.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
You can plug in an additional USB device
into the second USB port.
You can access both USB devices by using
voice commands.
Accessing and Viewing USB Media
(browse | search | show) all (album |
albums)
To access a USB device press the voice
button and when prompted say:
(browse | search | show) all (artist |
artists)
Voice command
USB 1
(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres)
USB 2
(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists)
Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
(browse | search | show) album ___
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings
(browse | search | show) artist ___
(browse | search | show) genre ___
You can access these menus using the
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 364).
(browse | search | show) playlist ___
387
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Commands for Audio
Sources
Voice Command
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command.
help
E142599
*
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
If equipped.
Radio Voice Commands
Voice Command
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button, and then
E142599
say any of the commands in the
following table.
(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Below are a few examples of voice
commands you can use.
If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
tone, say:
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
Voice Command
Radio
[tune [to]] AM 2
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)
You can then say any of the following
commands.
(disc | CD [player]) play
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
[tune [to]] FM 2
[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
Radio
[tune [to]] AM preset ___
tune [to] SAT
*
[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
Sirius
*
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___
388
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Command
Voice Commands
[tune [to]] FM 2
[tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___
[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])
[tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM preset ___
FM ___ HD ___
tune [to] [Sirius]
Help
*
[tune [to]] Sirius
[channel] ___
[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
HD ___
*
You can say the
channel number (0233) to listen to that
Sirius station.
[tune [to]] preset ___
CD Voice Commands
Tune
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button, and then say
any of the commands in the
following table.
help
*
E142599
If equipped.
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
(If equipped)
E142599
If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:
To listen to Sirius satellite radio,
press the voice button and, after
the tone, say:
Voice Command
(disc | CD [player]) play
Voice Commands
You can then say any of the following
commands.
Sirius
pause
When you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, you can press the voice
button, and say any of the commands
in the following table.
play
[play] next track
[play] previous track
Voice Commands
tune [to] SAT
[play | change to] track [number] ___
[tune [to]] SAT 1
repeat (track | song) [on]
[tune [to]] SAT 2
repeat folder [on]
[tune [to]] SAT 3
repeat off
[tune [to]] preset ___
(shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |
songs) [on]]
[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___
389
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Voice Command
(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |
disc) [on]
(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]
shuffle off
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Phone issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
There is excessive background noise during a phone
call.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC performance.
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to download my phonebook.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
The system says Phonebook
Try pushing your phonebook
Downloaded but the
This may be a limitation on contacts to SYNC by using
phonebook in SYNC is
your phone's capability.
the Add Contacts feature.
empty or missing contacts.
390
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Phone issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firmware.
391
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Phone issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
USB and media issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an autoinstall program or active
security settings.
SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
This is a device limitation.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC
This is a phone-dependent
website to confirm your
feature.
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
392
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
USB and media issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
The device is not connected.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copyright protection, which does
not allow it to play.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
You may be using the wrong
voice commands at the
voice commands.
beginning of their respective
sections.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
commands at the beginning
the name of a song or artist.
voice commands.
of the media section.
393
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
The system may not be
say "L-O-L-A".
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special characters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
voice commands.
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
SYNC does not understand
Wilson, say "Call Joe
or is calling the wrong
Wilson".
contact when I want to
Using
the
SYNC phone
make a call.
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
You may be saying the
SYNC is having trouble
name differently than the
understanding. SYNC will
way you saved it.
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
394
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain the system does not recognize them.
special characters.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call JA-K-E".
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. AdditionAppLink Mobile Applicaally, ensure your phone is
tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone
paired and connected to
New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC.
SYNC in order to find
find any applications.
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have downloaded and installed the
AppLink-enabled apps are
latest version of the app
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on from your phone's app store.
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or
395
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
Sometime apps do not
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open
finding the particular app
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC,
and choosing 'Force stop.'
over ignition cycles, for
cannot find any apps.
Don't forget to restart the
example.
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
There is a Bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.
396
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
My iPhone phone is
back in to the phone. After a
connected, my app is
The USB connection to
few seconds, the app should
running, I restarted the app
SYNC may need to be reset.
appear in SYNC's Mobile
but I still cannot find it on
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
SYNC.
Close" the application and
restart it.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have
AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
phone listed in SYNC's
available Bluetooth ports,
Mobile Apps Menu.
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
397
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Getting to Know Your System
GENERAL INFORMATION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can
simply touch the item or option that you
want to select. The button changes color
when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
E205444
398
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Menu Item
Action and Description
A
Status Bar
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.
B
Home
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.
C
Clock
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 448).
D
Outside
Temperature
This displays the current outside temperature.
E
Feature Bar
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
The Status Bar
The touchscreen allows you quick access
to all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar
you can quickly select the feature you want
to use.
Additional icons also display in the status
bar depending on market, vehicle options
and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
icons may move to the left or right
depending on what options are active.
Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).
399
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E223130
Callout
Item
Description
A
Driver Temperature
This shows the temperature the driver selects through
the climate control system.
B
Heated steering
wheel
When you activate the heated steering wheel option
on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays
when there is not a physical button for the heated
steering wheel.
(If equipped)
C
Passenger
Temperature
When the passenger's temperature has been
adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's
temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and
the temperatures are linked, the passenger's
temperature does not display.
D
Microphone Mute
This icon displays when your phone's microphone is
muted. A caller cannot hear you.
E
Mute
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.
400
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Callout
Item
Description
F
Download
This icon appears when SYNC 3 has received a software update. Pressing the icon shows more details
about the new software.
G
Wi-Fi
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.
H
Wi-Fi in Range
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.
I
Roaming
This icon displays when your cell phone is roaming.
J
Text Message
This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.
K
911 Assist Off
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.
L
Bluetooth Alert
The Bluetooth alert icon displays when there is an
active Bluetooth alert.
M
Bluetooth
This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.
Messages may also appear in the status
bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
Feature Bar Item
Functions
Audio
Allows you to control the media playing in
your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Climate
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan
speed and airflow within the vehicle.
Phone
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.
401
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Feature Bar Item
Navigation
(If equipped)
Functions
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on
a virtual road map, get driving directions to
your destination and find points of interest
along your route.
Apps
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).
Settings
You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar
indicating the status of the voice command
session. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 412).
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the
cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Using Voice Recognition
Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some
of the SYNC 3 features on your information
display. The features are visible in the right
hand display (A).
Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
402
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E208626
You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3
screen:
Option
Audio
Information
Information for current audio playing.
Select source.
Navigation
View current road and speed limit (if information is available).
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster
level), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability to
cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is
shown.
Phone
If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting: *
403
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Option
Information
Quick
dial
All calls
Incoming calls Outgoing calls Missed calls
If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand
steering wheel controls.
* Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and
hold to end a voice session.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
• Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle
is traveling, not true direction (for example,
if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle
of the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call
or switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or
reject an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may
be combined with PHONE REJECT and
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with
PHONE ACCEPT.
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.
M:Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Using Your Bezel Controls
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
See Steering Wheel (page 67).
404
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power: Switch the audio system on
and off.
VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
Eject: Eject a CD from the audio
system.
SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly
to advance through available media
modes.
SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 345).
DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
Temperature, fan and climate
control buttons: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system. See
Climate Control (page 117).
WARNINGS
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
911 Assist
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, by visiting:
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
405
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains
and Roadside Emergencies sections of
your owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings
(page 448).
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
406
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
SYNC™ 3
Safety Information
•
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
•
•
•
Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC 3.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•
•
•
Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
sports scores, movie times or ski
conditions.
Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Restricted features
Cellular Phone
Pairing a Bluetooth phone.
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.
System Functionality
Editing the keypad code.
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.
407
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Restricted features
Wi-Fi
Editing Wi-Fi settings.
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Text Messages
Viewing received text messages.
Navigation
Using the keyboard to enter a destination.
Demo navigation route.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.
is supported by Android and iPhone and it
is available through the App Store and
Google Play. The MyFord mobile app is
available through a free download.
Services included for four years. Text and
data rates apply to usage.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•
•
•
Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Maintain account permissions.
•
•
Updating Your System
Visit the website to sign up and register.
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log
into your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
MyFord Mobile™ with Embedded
Modem (If Equipped)
Website
Connect to your vehicle using the MyFord
Mobile app on your smartphone. The
embedded modem in your vehicle
communicates with the app and allows
you to start, lock, unlock and locate your
vehicle remotely. The app also connects
you with other vehicle resources like a
parking locator, roadside assistance, dealer
locations and Ford Support. MyFord Mobile
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
408
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
FCC: LHJ-FAN
IC: 2807E-FAN
SYNC™ 3
You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature.
If you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 448). You can also perform
a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 460).
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to
start the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your
use of the system. Navigation updates
cannot be installed in the background,
because the files are too large.
If you would like to switch this feature
on later, select:
To install the update in your vehicle,
remove anything that is plugged in the USB
ports on the media hub and plug in the
USB drive containing the update. When
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation
should begin immediately. After a
successful installation, the update is
available the next time the vehicle is
started.
Menu Item
Settings
General
Automatic
System
Updates
Please refer to the website for any further
actions.
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.
When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are
enabled, your system checks for software
updates periodically. If a new version is
available, it downloads at that time.
Software downloads can take place for up
to 30 minutes after you have switched your
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If
a download does not complete for any
reason, the download continues where it
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected
opportunity. Upon activation of an update,
a banner displays on the touchscreen
indicating the system update. Select the
icon to see more detail. This icon displays
for two ignition cycles.
To connect your system to Wi-Fi,
select:
Menu Item
Settings
Wi-Fi
Available
Wi-Fi
Networks
You can then select your
Wi-Fi network. You may
have to enter the security
code if the network is
secured. The system
confirms when it has
connected to the network.
409
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system
prompts you to set up a
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature.
SYNC™ 3
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
log profile and other system data may be
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
To switch this feature off:
Menu Item
Settings
General
Automatic
System
Updates
In this menu selection, you
can change the selection
for automatic updates to
OFF.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is
connected.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored
information. You can find more information
about the Master Reset in General
Settings. See Settings (page 448). System
data cannot be accessed without special
equipment and access to your vehicle's
SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access the system
data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order,
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
United States: 1-800-392-3673.
Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
410
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
HOME SCREEN
E205446
Item
Tile
Home screen display
A
Audio
Shows the active media source.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the
compass.
B
Phone
The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The
status of the phone features also appear. This includes signal
strength, battery charge, 911 assist setting state (On or Off),
text messaging and roaming.
C
Navigation
*
This map displays your current location or current route in real
time.
When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn
and the length of time and distance to your destination.
411
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Tile
Home screen display
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the
audio information.
*
If equipped.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
You can touch any of the feature displays
to access that feature.
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
E142599
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
Voice Command
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and Description
Main Menu
Brings you to the main menu.
Go back
Returns you to the previous screen.
Cancel
Ends the voice session.
List of Commands
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.
___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
Next Page
You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Help
Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
412
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Audio Voice Commands
Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command
Sirius Channel ___
Description
*
AM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "88.7 FM" or "1580 AM".
FM ___
FM ___ HD ___
You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16". You can also just say
the name of a Sirius station such as "The Pulse".
*
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “88.7 FM HD 1”.
Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetoothconnected device.
USB
Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
Play Genre ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Browse ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
* This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
413
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Climate Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
To adjust the temperature, say:
Voice command
Description
Climate Set Temperature ___
Adjust the temperature between 59.0°F
(15°C)-86.0°F (30°C).
Climate Help
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth-enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command
Pair Phone
Description
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 448).
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Voice command
Description
Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Dial ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.
414
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
Voice Command
Description
<0-9>
If the full number was not entered with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.
Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.
Clear
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Voice command
Description
Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___
You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Reply to Message
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or an address.
Navigation Voice Commands
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
Voice command
Description
Find an Address
Allows you to enter the address search functionality.
Find a ___
State the name of the POI category you would like to search for
such as "Find restaurants".
Find POI
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.
415
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command
Description
Find Intersection
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.
Destination Nearest
___
State the name of the POI category you would like to search for
nearby such as "Destination nearest restaurants".
Destination Previous Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.
Destination
Destination Home
Allows you to route to your home address.
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
Voice command
Description
Cancel Route
Cancels the current route.
Detour
Allows you to select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction
Repeats the last guidance prompt.
Show Route
Displays the active route.
Where Am I
Provides current location.
Zoom in
Allows you to zoom in on the map.
Zoom out
Allows you to zoom out from the map.
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
Voice command
Description
Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.
Find New Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
416
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
Voice command
Description
Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
app
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app, followed by
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
Voice command
Show Traffic
Description
Displays a list of traffic incidents.
Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map.
Show Fuel Prices
Displays a list of fuel prices.
Show 5 Day Forecast
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice command
Description
Voice Settings
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.
Interaction Mode
Standard
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.
Interaction Mode
Advanced
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.
Phone Confirmation On
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.
417
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command
Phone Confirmation Off
Description
The system does not confirm before placing a call.
Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
418
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
ENTERTAINMENT
E205443
Message
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Message and description
A
Sources
Sources
B
Direct Tune
C
Presets
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu item
AM
FM
SIRIUS
*
CD
*
USB
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.
419
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu item
Bluetooth Stereo
Apps
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
* This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
Menu item
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
Action and description
Enter
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Menu item
Cancel
Press to exit
without changing
the station.
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
Presets
To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:
Direct Tune
To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
There are two preset banks available for
AM and three banks for FM. To access
additional presets, tap the preset button.
The indicator on the preset button shows
which bank of presets you are currently
viewing.
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
420
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and
other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for Sirius:
Menu item
Action and description
Browse
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.
Direct Tune
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter
The system tunes to the station you select.
Cancel
You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
421
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu item
Replay
Action and description
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
Live
ALERT
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
Settings (page 448).
There are three preset banks available for
SIRIUS. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
preset button shows which bank of presets
you are currently viewing.
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 448).
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Antenna obstructions
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.
422
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting tips
Message
Acquiring Signal
Cause
Action
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or
system failure present.
SIRIUS system failure
Invalid Channel
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able.
choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-5397474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Satellite acquiring
signal…
The signal is lost from the
The signal is blocked. When
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.
Updating…
Update of channel programming in progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Questions? Call 1888-539-7474
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-5397474 to resolve subscription
issues.
None found. Check
channel guide.
All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn
category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on
locked.
that station.
SIRIUS Subscription
updated
SIRIUS has updated the chan- No action required.
nels available for your vehicle.
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 448).
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
423
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
Website
www.hdradio.com
Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message
Presets
Action and description
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
424
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Reception area
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
Station blending
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
Issues
Cause
Action
Echo, stutter, skip or
This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio.
the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
The digital multicast is not
No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio
normal behavior. Wait until the
broadcast is decoded. Once
audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.
425
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
SYNC™ 3
Potential station issues
Issues
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Cause
Action
The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
preset or direct tune is not
is not available in your current
available in your current recep- location.
tion area.
Text information does Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently
broadcaster.
*
playing audio.
There is no text
Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
information shown for broadcaster.
*
currently selected
frequency.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
Website
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences
CD (If equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
* You can find the form here:
The following buttons are also available:
Button
Function
Browse
You can use the browse button to select a track.
Repeat
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
426
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
Button
Function
Repeat
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Shuffle
Play the tracks in random order.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
Button
Function
Browse
If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.
New Search
This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
427
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Function
Composers
A-Z Jump
This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
Explore Device
If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
USB Port
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
E229068
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.
The USB port is on the instrument panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or bluetooth-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 445).
428
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
may look different from one of the screens
shown below. Your screen may not contain
all of the features shown.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 448).
E206820
A
Driver temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.
B
Heated steering wheel:
Note: This feature only functions when you switch the engine on.
Touch this icon to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. It takes about
5 minutes to warm the steering wheel to 74°F in temperatures as low as -4°F.
The wheel maintains an approximate temperature of 90°F and operates
independently from the heated seats and other climate-control functions. The
heating element is in between the leather covering and foam core to help provide
maximum heat without adversely affecting the feel of the steering wheel.
429
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: The heated steering wheel may remain on after remote starting the
vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated steering wheel may
also turn on when you start your vehicle, if it was on when you switched your
vehicle off.
Note: For steering wheels with wood trim, the heating feature will not heat the
wheel between the 10 and 2 o'clock positions.
C
Defrost: A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options.
MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Air flows through the
windshield vents, the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the
driver and passenger temperatures are set to HI. You can use this setting to
defog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister
vents.
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 125).
D
AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature.
E
Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the
climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
F
DUAL: This button lights up when the passenger controls are active. To switch
the off and link the passenger temperature to the driver temperature, touch the
DUAL button.
Note: the passenger side temperature and the DUAL indication automatically
turn on when you or your passenger adjust the passenger temperature.
G
Passenger temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.
H
Fan speed: Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that
circulates in your vehicle.
Note: You cannot adjust the fan speed when the system is set to AUTO or MAX
A/C.
I
A/C: A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options.
MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and
passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated
air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
430
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: In certain conditions (for example, Max Defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even when you switch the air conditioning
A/C button off.
Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off. When
recirculated air is on, it may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down
the interior (when used with A/C) and help reduce odors from reaching the
interior.
Note: Recirculatied air may turn off automatically (or the system may preventit
from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging.
It may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel/Floor airflow modes
during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
J
Manual airflow distribution controls: Select these controls individually,
together, or with Defrost to direct the air flow to the area you desire.
Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor
vents.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
PHONE
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of the system. Once you pair your
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
While the system supports a variety of
features, many are dependent on your cell
phone’s functionality.
431
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Websites
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
432
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E205447
Item
A
Menu Item
Recent Call
List
Action and Description
Displays your recent calls.
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at
the top of the screen. You can choose:
All
B
Contacts
Incoming
Missed
All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical
order.
A-Z Jump
C
Outgoing
Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.
Phone Settings Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone
settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones
and alerts. See Settings (page 448).
433
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Menu Item
Action and Description
D
Text Messages Displays all recent text messages.
E
Phone Keypad Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call
F
Press this button to begin a
call.
Do Not Disturb Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail.
New text message notifications are not displayed on the screen
and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Users with phones having voice services
may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 362). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.
434
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
To accept the call, select:
To call a number in your contacts,
select:
Menu Item
Contacts
Menu Item
Action and Description
Accept
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the
number that you want to
call. The system begins the
call.
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Recent Call
List
You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.
To call a number that is not stored in
your phone, select:
Menu Item
The phone status items are also visible:
•
•
•
Action and Description
Phone
Keypad
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Call
The system begins the call.
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
435
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Signal Strength.
Battery.
911 Assist (United States and Canada
Only). See Settings (page 448).
SYNC™ 3
Item
Item
End Call
Privacy
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the
button on the
steering wheel.
Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.
Text Messaging
Keypad
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Mute
You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Hear It
Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.
View
View the text on the touchscreen.
Call
To call the sender.
Reply
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Close
To exit the screen.
Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disables
some SYNC 3 features.
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto to access your phone.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
newer with iOS 7.1 or newer (Ford
recommends updating to the latest iOS
version). To enable this feature, plug your
phone into a USB port and select Apple
CarPlay on your SYNC 3 screen. See Media
Hub (page 359).
436
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
To disable Apple CarPlay on your iPhone,
go to your SYNC 3 Settings and select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Menu Item
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your
device and select:
Disable
To return to SYNC 3, select the
speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the screen and
then select the option to return to SYNC.
Disable
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC
app.
NAVIGATION (If Equipped)
Android Auto
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
Download the Android Auto app to your
device from Google Play to prepare your
device (this may require mobile data
usage). To enable this feature, plug your
device into a USB port and select Android
Auto on your SYNC 3 screen. See Media
Hub (page 359).
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe.
To disable Android Auto on your device, go
to your SYNC 3 Settings and select:
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value.
3D city models are complete 3D models
of entire city areas including navigable
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in
3D map mode only. Coverage of these
varies and improves with updated map
releases.
437
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207752
E207751
Select the zoom out icon to see
a farther away view of the map.
Points of Interest (POI)
grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
at the same location a box is used to
display a single category icon instead of
repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
clutter. When you select the box on the
map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can scroll through and select POIs
from this list.
E207753
You can adjust the view in preset
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in
or out of the map.
The information bar tells you the names
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover
over them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:
E207750
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
Heading up (2D map) This
always shows the direction of
forward travel to be upward on
the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic
flow will be indicated on the map by green
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is
indicated where the information is
available and varies across the US.
North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction to
be upward on the screen.
E207749
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
E207748
touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different
types of incidents. See Settings (page
448).
You can set a destination by hovering
above a location and selecting:
Button
Start
438
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
Menu Item
Description
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Search
Street Address
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
One to six decimal places are accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.
tions
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
439
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Description
These locations cannot be deleted individually. To delete them,
preform a master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting (page 460).
Home
Select to navigate to your set Home destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
Home
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:
Yes
Enter a location into the search bar and press:
Save
Work
Select to navigate to your set Work destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
Work
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:
Yes
Enter a location into the search bar and press:
Save
Favorites
Favorites include any location you have previously saved.
To add Favorites:
Add a
Select this button and enter a location into the destination
Favorite bar.
Search
Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.
Save
Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
(POI) Categories configuration):
Food
Fuel
hotel
ATM
440
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Description
See All
Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Save
This saves the destination to your favorites.
Start
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Fastest
Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Shortest
Uses the shortest distance possible.
Economical Route
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.
The time and distance for each route also displays.
Cancel
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.
Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Menu Item
Start
Action and Description
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
441
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
Screen View
Full Map
A full screen map displays during navigation.
Highway
Exit Info
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
of the screen during navigation.
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.
Turn List
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.
Traffic List
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
442
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Navigation
Settings
Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 448).
Where Am I?
Provides your current location city, longitude and latitude and the
nearest road.
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
Cancel Route
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.
Mute Guidance
Selecting this option switches off the audio navigation guidance. Press
the button again to un-mute guidance.
View Route
Press this to see a map of the full route.
Detour
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.
Edit Waypoints
Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
You can
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:
Optimize Order
To return to Go
your route
press:
1.
Select the search icon (magnifying
glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:
443
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Add Waypoint
The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.
You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order
for you by pressing:
To return to your route, press:
Go
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1110
cities (1049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
444
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Restaurant
Business center
Handicap facilities
Laundry
Refrigerator
24 hour room service
Fitness center
Internet access
Pool
Wi-Fi
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps
(page 445).
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps. Once
an app is running through AppLink, you can
control main features of the app through
voice commands and steering wheel
controls.
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Navigation Map Updates
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
visit:
Websites
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
445
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
Applink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the App needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.
Menu Item
Connect Mobile
Apps
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 448).
App Permissions
The system organizes the App permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change
a permission group status any time when
not driving, by using the settings menu.
While in the settings menu, you can also
see the data included in each group.
Action and Description
SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
the system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group
permission control.
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
necessary to provide this service,
troubleshoot, and improve products and
services and to offer you products and
services that may interest you where
allowed by law.
Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions,
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
settings menu.
446
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Equipped)
WARNING
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Menu Item
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Action and Description
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
447
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
Area
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Ski Conditions
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
Sound
SETTINGS
Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:
Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.
Sound Settings
Reset All
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.
Treble
Adjusts the high frequency level.
Midrange
Adjusts the middle frequency level.
Bass
Adjusts the low frequency level.
Balance / Fade
Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.
Speed Adaptive
Volume
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
or turns the feature off.
Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings
Stereo
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
448
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Podcast Speed
Action and Description
For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower
Normal
Faster
Audiobook Speed For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Cover Art Priority
Reset Media
Slower
Normal
Faster
Media Player
Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.
Gracenote®
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.
Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.
Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
base Info
Device Information
This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
media device.
You can adjust the following features:
Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Clock Format
Select how time displays.
Auto Time Zone
Update
When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.
This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
Reset Clock to
GPS Time
When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.
449
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Bluetooth
The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.
Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:
Menu Item
Bluetooth
Action
Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit
new connections.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth-enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth
device is the same as pairing a phone. See
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Phone
Menu Item
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Add Phone
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
Then select:
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
450
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Website
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Website
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
owner.ford.com
Menu Item
Action and Description
View Devices
You can then select:
Add a Bluetooth
Device
You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
the previous table.
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
Connect
Disconnect
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.
Device Information
Allows you to see phone and device information.
Make Primary
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.
Delete
Removes the selected device from the system.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Automatic
Contact Download On/Off
Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Sort By:
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
451
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
First Name
Last Name
Re-download
Contacts
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.
Delete Contacts
Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No Ringtone
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.
Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone
a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No Alert
(Silence)
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout
When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.
452
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Mute Audio in
Privacy
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Roaming
Warning
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
you attempt to place a call.
Low Battery
Notification
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
is running low.
Select this button to modify the on or off
setting for this feature. If the mobile
phone’s contacts have been downloaded,
you can adjust the following option:
911 Assist
Note: This service is only available in the
United States and Canada.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Set Emergency
Contacts
You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phonebook as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911
Assist call process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:
453
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
FM HD Radio
Action and Description
Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Available)
Radio Text
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.
Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Menu Item
Action and Description
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model
When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.
Breadcrumbs
When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.
POI Icons
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
Once this feature is activated you can select
the icons you want displayed by selecting:
Incident Map
Icons
Select POIs
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
to have displayed on the navigation map.
454
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Route Preferences
Menu Item
Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest
Always Use ___
Route
Fastest
Eco
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Automatically
Find Parking
The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
you approach your destination.
Eco Time
Penalty
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a
Guidance
route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.
Avoid Freeways If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation
route.
Avoid Toll
Roads
If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation
route.
Avoid
Ferries/Car
Trains
If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing
a navigation route.
455
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Preferences
Menu Item
Action and Description
Navigation Preferences
Guidance
Prompts
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.
Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones A tone sounds followed by voice instructions.
Voice Only
Only voice instructions are given.
Tones Only
Only a tone sounds to prompt you.
The connected devices sends data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage
statistics and debugging information.
Updates may take place automatically.
Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data
plan associated with the connected device.
Menu Item
Mobile Apps
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Action and Description
Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic
updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile
Apps
This provides information on the current state of available app
updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed
Up-To-Date
456
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Updating Mobile Apps…
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
The system has
No update is
detected a new app
required.
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is
required.
The system is trying to receive
an update.
Request Update
Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:
Request Update
All Apps
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.
There may also
be SYNC 3
enabled apps
listed under
these options.
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
can see which signals are included in each group.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings,
voice features, as well as phone, navigation
and wireless settings.
Menu Item
Language
Select to have the touchscreen display in English,
Spanish or French.
Distance
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Touch Screen Beep
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.
Automatic System Updates
When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have an available Internet
connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile
connection.
457
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
About
Information pertaining to the system and its software.
Software Licenses
Documentation of the software license for the system.
Master Reset
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
Wi-Fi
You can adjust the following:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Wi-Fi
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.
View Available
Networks
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.
Wi-Fi Available
Notifications
The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
Door Keypad Code
Select this button to add or erase a
personal door keypad code. To add or
erase a personal code, you first need to
enter the five-digit factory set code. You
can find this code on the owner's wallet
card in the glove box or from your
authorized dealer.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.
Vehicle
Note: You vehicle may not have all of these
features.
458
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message
Action and Description
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Rear Camera
Delay
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your
system. You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Brightness
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.
Mode
You can select:
Auto Dim
Auto
The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.
Day
The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Night
The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.
Off
The screen goes black and does not display anything.
To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen.
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.
459
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
Menu Item
Advanced Mode
Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts
and confirmations.
Phone Confirmation
Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts
name with you before making a call.
Voice Command List
Enable this option to have the system display a list of
available voice commands when the voice button is
pressed.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
When you select valet mode a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN
you chose but you must use the same PIN
to disable valet mode. The system asks
you to input the code.
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility,
visit the Ford website.
Note: If the system is locked and you
cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the Customer Relationship Center.
Website
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
United States: 1-800-392-3673
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
460
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
There is background noise
during a phone
call.
The audio control
settings on your cell
phone may be affecting
SYNC 3 performance.
Refer to your device's manual about audio
adjustments.
During a call, I
can hear the
Possible cell phone
other person
malfunction.
but they cannot
hear me.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
During a call, I
cannot hear the
The system may need to
other person
be restarted.
and they cannot
hear me.
To restart your system, shut down the
engine, open and close the door, and then
lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
and the lighted USB port is off.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not
able to download my phone- Possible cell phone
book.
malfunction.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
icon on the phone screen.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
The system
says "Phonebook downloaded" but my Limitations on your cell
SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability.
book is empty or
is missing
contacts.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
If the missing contacts are stored on your
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
461
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue
Possible cause
This is a cell phonedependent feature.
Possible solution
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
cell phone to
SYNC 3.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
again.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
iPhone
•
•
•
Text messaging
is not working
on SYNC 3.
•
•
Go to your cell phone's Settings.
Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named SYNC enter the next
menu.
Turn Show Notifications on.
Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward
incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
462
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not supported.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.
Audible text
messages do
not work on my
This is a cell phone limitacell phone.
tion.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
Possible device malfunc- cable.
tion.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.
Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
I start my
temperatures.
vehicle.
Bluetooth audio This is a devicedoes not
dependent feature.
stream.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
player on your device.
463
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
The device is not
connected.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popusong title, album or genre lated.
information.
The file may be
corrupted.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
version.
SYNC 3 does
The song may have
not recognize
copyright protection that
music that is on does not allow it to play.
my device.
The file format is not
supported by SYNC 3.
Some devices require you to change the
USB settings from mass storage to media
transfer protocol class.
Convert the file to a supported format. See
Entertainment (page 419).
The device needs to be
re-indexed.
Perform a master reset. See Settings
(page 448).
The device has a lock
screen enabled.
Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
to SYNC 3.
When I connect
my device, I
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
sometimes do
This is a device limitation.
select AirPlay from the devices Control
not hear any
Center, then select Dock Connector.
sound.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
464
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Issue
Failed connection.
Disconnecting after
successful connection.
Possible cause
Possible solution
Password error.
Verify password.
Weak signal.
Check for a poor Wi-Fi
signal.
Multiple Access points
within range with the same
SSID.
Use a unique name for your
SSID, don’t use the default
name unless it contains a
unique identifier, such as
part of the MAC address.
Weak signal probably due
to distance from the
hotspot, obstruction or high
interference.
Position the vehicle close to
the hotspot with the front of
the vehicle facing the
hotspot direction and
remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth, microwave and
cordless phones may cause
interference.
Poor signal seen by SYNC 3 There may be an obstruction If the vehicle is equipped
with heated windshield, try
despite being near a
between SYNC 3 and the
positioning the vehicle so
hotspot.
hotspot.
that the windshield is not
facing the hotspot. If you
have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield,
position the vehicle to face
the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the
windows in the direction of
the hotspot if that is feasible.
Try to remove other
obstructions that may
impact signal quality such
as opening the garage door.
A hotspot is not listed in the The hotspot was defined as Please set the network to
list of available networks.
a hidden network.
visible and try again.
465
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Issue
Possible cause
SYNC 3 is not seen when
SYNC 3 does not currently
searching for Wi-Fi networks provide a hotspot.
from your phone or other
devices.
Possible solution
SYNC 3 currently does not
provide a hotspot
Software download takes
too long.
Poor signal strength, too far
from the hotspot, hotspot is
supporting multiple
connections, slow Internet
connection or other problems.
Check the signal quality
(under network details), if
SYNC 3 indicates good or
excellent, test with another
high-speed equipped
hotspot where the environment is more predictable.
SYNC 3 seems to connect
with a hotspot and the
signal strength is excellent
but the software is not being
updated.
It is possible that there is no
new software. The
connected hotspot may be
a managed one and it
requires either a subscription or agreeing to the terms
and conditions.
Test the connection with
another device, if the
hotspot requires a subscription, you may contact the
service provider.
AppLink issues
Issue
AppLink Mobile Applications: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC 3 does
not find any applications.
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
You did not connect an
Applink Compatible phone
to SYNC 3.
Make sure you have a
compatible smartphone; an
Android with OS 2.3 or
higher or an iPhone 3GS or
newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
Additionally, make sure you
pair and connect your phone
466
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
to SYNC 3 in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to a USB
port with an Apple USB
cable.
Make sure you have downloaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Make sure the app is running
AppLink-enabled apps are on your phone. Some apps
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on require you to register or
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device.
login to the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC 3 find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometimes apps do not
option, then select it and
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open
restart the app. If the app
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC 3,
does not have that option,
over ignition cycles, for
cannot find any apps.
select the phone's settings
example.
menu and select 'Apps',
then find the particular app
and choose 'Force stop.' Do
not forget to restart the app
afterward, then select "Find
New Apps" on SYNC 3.
467
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tap the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC 3's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
There is a Bluetooth issue
on some older versions of
the Android operating
system that may cause apps
that were found on your
previous vehicle drive to not
be found again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.
468
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Switch Bluetooth off and
then on to reset it on your
phone. If you are in your
vehicle, SYNC 3 should be
able to automatically reconnect to your phone if you
press the "Phone" button.
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
My iPhone is connected, my
back in to the phone. After a
app is running, I restarted
You may need to reset the
few seconds, the app should
the app but I still cannot find USB connection to SYNC 3.
appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
it on SYNC 3.
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
Increase the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
The Bluetooth volume on
app on SYNC 3, but there is
the phone may be low.
no sound or the sound is
very low.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
Bluetooth ports that apps
can use to connect. If you
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my have more AppLink apps on
phone listed in the SYNC 3 your phone than the number
of available Bluetooth ports,
Mobile Apps Menu.
you will not see all of your
apps listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
3 to find. If the app has a
"Ford SYNC" setting, disable
that setting in the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
You may be using the
SYNC 3 does
wrong voice commands.
not understand
what I am
saying.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong
time.
Review the cell phone voice commands
and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective sections.
Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before
you state your command.
469
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
You may be using the
Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
SYNC 3 does
the name exactly as it
not understand appears on your device.
the name of a
song or artist.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
or is calling the
wrong contact
when I want to
make a call.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recognizing foreign
names stored
on my cell
phone.
Make sure you are saying the complete title
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
The song or artist name
may have some special
characters that are not
being recognized by
SYNC 3.
Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
and playlists names do not have any special
characters like *, - or +.
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phonebook.
Make sure that you are saying the name
exactly as it appears on your phone. For
example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
The contact name may
contain special characters.
Make sure that your contact names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
contact names stored on your cell phone.
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phonebook.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
for phonebook and then contact name.
Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
3 will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
470
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Issue
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recognizing foreign
tracks, artists,
albums, genres
and playlist
names from my
media player or
USB flash drive.
Possible cause
Possible solution
You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC 3.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the names
stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions
for very popular artist names (for example,
U2) such that you can always use the
English pronunciation for these artists.
The system
generates voice
prompts and
SYNC 3 uses text-tothe pronuncispeech voice prompt
ation of some
technology.
words may not
be accurate for
my language.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
voice.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
471
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
General
Issue
The language
selected for the
instrument
cluster and
information and
entertainment
display does not
match the
SYNC 3
language
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and
voice prompts).
Possible cause
Possible solution
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a
single module for text display, voice control
and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four
languages based on the most popular
SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
the currently selected
language for the instru- current active language.
ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
display.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting please call or visit the Ford
Website.
Ford Support
Customer Relation- United States: 1-800-392-3673
ship Center
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
Website
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
472
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
•
•
Electrochromatic compass or
temperature interior mirrors.
Premium carpeted floor mats.
Lifestyle
Web Address (United States)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Peace of Mind
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ford Motor Company warrants your
vehicle's accessory through the warranty
that provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Exterior Style
Bumper protectors.
Graphics.
Hood deflector.
Rear spoiler.
Side window deflectors.
Splash guards.
Wheels.
Interior Style
•
•
All-weather floor mats.
Door sill plates.
473
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Bumper-mounted parking sensor*.
Keyless entry keypad.
Remote start.
Roadside assistance kit*.
Vehicle security systems.
Wheel locks.
*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the accessory
manufacturer's limited warranty details
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ash cup or smoker's packages.
Car covers*.
Cargo area protectors.
Cargo net.
Cargo organizers.
Interior light kit.
Roof racks and carriers*.
Tablet cradle*.
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did
not design them specifically for
automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
474
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH FORD
PROTECT.
Rental Car Reimbursement
Ford Protect (U.S. Only)
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
1st day Rental Benefit
Ford Protect means peace of mind. It’s the
extended service plan backed by Ford
Motor Company, and provides more
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Extended
Service Plan. With Ford Protect you
minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
•
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
•
•
There are four core Ford Protect with
different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
•
1.
PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect plan coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new
owner. Which should give you and your
potential buyer a little more peace of mind.
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
Ford Protect is honored by all authorized
Ford dealers in the U.S., Canada and
Mexico.
Ford Protect also offers a Premium
Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so
you never have to worry about the cost of
your vehicle’s maintenance.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
475
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake pads and linings.
Shock absorbers.
Struts.
Engine Belts.
Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer
while paying over time. You are
pre-approved with no credit check or
hassles. To learn more, call our Ford
Protect Extended Service Plan specialists
at 800-367-3377.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
(CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
•
•
•
•
Rental reimbursement.
Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
Roadside Assistance benefits.
476
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers).
477
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the message
appearing. Make sure you reset the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil
change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset
(page 262).
Additives and Chemicals
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5000 miles (8000
kilometers) from your last oil change.
Never exceed one year or 10000 miles
(16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
478
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
479
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Accessory drive belt(s)
Hazard warning system operation
Battery performance
Horn operation
Engine air filter
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Exhaust system
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation
*
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary
Steering and linkage
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure
*
**
For oil and fluid leaks
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots
Washer spray and wiper operation
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
480
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Interval
Vehicle use and example
Normal
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Severe
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
**
Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (AWD only).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
481
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 261).
1
Other maintenance items
Every 20000 miles (32000 Replace cabin air filter.
km)
Every 30000 miles (48000 Replace engine air filter.
km)
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
2
Change engine coolant.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
4
Replace timing belt (1.5L engine).
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
482
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the
message appearing in the information
display prompting you to change your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers).
Perform the 30000-mile
(48000-kilometer) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not
come on, but the odometer reads
30000 miles (48000 kilometers) (for
example, the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor was reset at 25000 miles
[40000 kilometers]). Perform the
engine air filter replacement.
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD only).
Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid.
km)
Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs.
km)
483
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Replace engine air filter.
Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid.
km)
Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs.
km)
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Replace engine air filter.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months
*
Change engine oil and filter.
Perform multi-point inspection.
Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid.
km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 261).
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
Every oil change
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
484
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Exceptions
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 3000 miles (5000
kilometers).
Rear Axle and PTU Maintenance
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear
axle (AWD only) in your vehicle does not
require any normal scheduled maintenance
unless the unit shows signs of leakage.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1800 miles (3000 kilometers).
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
485
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
486
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Dealer stamp
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
Dealer stamp
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
487
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
488
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
489
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
490
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Dealer stamp
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
Dealer stamp
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
491
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
492
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
493
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
494
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
495
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
•
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
•
•
You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
•
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
•
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•
You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
496
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
Appendices
•
•
•
•
Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
•
497
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
Appendices
•
•
Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
498
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
•
Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
499
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
•
•
•
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (i) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
500
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
•
501
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
502
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim. Arbitration fees and incentives.
•
•
•
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(i) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
503
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
3. Software License
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
•
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
3.1 License Limitations
•
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
i. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
504
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
Appendices
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
•
4. Disclaimers
•
To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
•
5. Limitation of Liability
•
505
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
•
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
•
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
506
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
Appendices
8.6
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
•
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
507
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
508
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
509
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
510
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
511
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
RF Certification Logos for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)
E202555
Brazil
E207816
Argentina
E207818
European Union EU
E207817
Abu Dhabi, Dubai
E207819
Jordan
E197509
E207820
Malaysia
512
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
E197811
E207822
Moldova
Singapore
E207821
E198002
Morocco
South Africa
E198001
Philippines
E203899
E197844
Serbia
513
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
E203679
Taiwan
E198009
Ukraine
514
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
A
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............92
Headlamps On Warning Chime......................92
Keyless Warning Alert.........................................92
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................92
A/C
See: Climate Control...........................................117
Audio Control..................................................68
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
MODE.......................................................................69
Seek, Next or Previous.......................................69
See: Brakes............................................................173
Audio System................................................345
ABS driving hints
General Information.........................................345
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................173
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio.............................348
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
CD...................................................................346
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
FM/CD..........................................................350
Accessories....................................................473
Exterior Style........................................................473
Interior Style.........................................................473
Lifestyle..................................................................473
Peace of Mind......................................................473
Menu Structure....................................................351
Accessories
Autolamps.........................................................74
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................12
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps.........................................................74
ACC
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System.......................120
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
Without: Sony Audio System.................119
Automatic High Beam Control..................76
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............195
Active Park Assist.........................................185
Deactivating the Active Park Assist
Feature..............................................................189
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular Parking,
Parallel Park Out Assist..............................185
Troubleshooting the System.........................189
Activating the System.........................................77
Manually Overriding the System.....................77
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................271
Automatic Transmission............................163
Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................272
Vertical Aim Adjustment..................................271
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning.............................................................167
Brake-Shift Interlock Override......................166
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................167
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission...................................................165
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission.............................163
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................67
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column................................................................67
Airbag Disposal...............................................47
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...........................................117
Air Filter
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 1.5L EcoBoost™/2.0L EcoBoost™/
2.5L................................................................266
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 2.7L EcoBoost™........................................267
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............278
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................66
All-Wheel Drive.............................................168
Ambient Lighting...........................................80
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................66
Adding Transmission Fluid ............................268
Checking the Transmission Fluid Level
..............................................................................267
Arming the Alarm................................................66
Disarming the Alarm...........................................66
Auto-Start-Stop.............................................151
Appendices...................................................496
Apps.................................................................445
Disabling Auto StartStop.................................152
Enabling Auto StartStop...................................151
..................................................................................445
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................447
515
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Autowipers.........................................................71
Changing a Bulb...........................................274
Autowipers Settings............................................72
Headlamp.............................................................275
LED Lamps...........................................................275
License Plate Lamp...........................................276
Reversing Lamp..................................................275
Auxiliary Power Points................................142
110 Volt AC Power Point...................................142
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................142
Locations...............................................................142
Changing a Fuse..........................................254
AWD
Fuses......................................................................254
Changing a Road Wheel.............................312
See: All-Wheel Drive.........................................168
Changing a Road Wheel Procedure............314
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.......................................................312
Stowing the Flat Tire..........................................317
Stowing the Flat Tire Using the Retainer
Strap....................................................................317
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................269
Blind Spot Information System..............207
Changing the 12V Battery.........................269
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................278
Switching the System Off and On..............209
System Errors.....................................................209
Using the System...............................................207
2.5L Engine...........................................................278
EcoBoost Engines..............................................278
Bonnet Lock
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................271
Checking MyKey System Status...............56
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........256
Booster Seats..................................................25
Types of Booster Seats......................................26
MyKey Distance....................................................56
Number of Admin Keys......................................56
Number of MyKeys..............................................56
Brake Fluid Check........................................268
Brakes................................................................173
Checking the Wiper Blades......................270
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................37
Child Restraint Positioning..........................27
Child Safety.......................................................16
General Information...........................................173
Breaking-In.....................................................228
Bulb Specification Chart...........................276
C
General Information.............................................16
Cabin Air Filter................................................125
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................330
Child Safety Locks.........................................28
Left-Hand Side......................................................29
Right-Hand Side...................................................29
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................283
Cleaning Products.......................................279
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................283
Cleaning the Engine.....................................281
Cleaning the Exterior..................................279
Specifications.....................................................330
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................333
Specifications.....................................................334
Capacities and Specifications 2.5L................................................................336
Exterior Chrome Parts.....................................280
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................280
Stripes or Graphics...........................................280
Underbody...........................................................280
Under Hood.........................................................280
Specifications......................................................337
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™................................................340
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................282
Cleaning the Interior...................................282
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades............................................................281
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56
Specifications......................................................341
Capacities and Specifications.................321
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................279
Center Console..............................................144
Center Console with Rotary Control...........144
516
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Climate............................................................429
Climate Control...............................................117
Climate Controlled Seats..........................135
Driving Hints..................................................228
Driving Through Water...............................228
DRL
Cooled Seats........................................................135
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................76
Coolant Check
E
See: Engine Coolant Check............................263
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......46
Creating a MyKey............................................55
Economical Driving.....................................228
Electric Parking Brake..................................174
Programming or Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................56
Applying the Electric Parking brake.............174
Battery With No Charge....................................176
Parking On a Hill (Vehicles With a Manual
Transmission) .................................................174
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake...........175
Cross Traffic Alert........................................209
False Alerts............................................................212
Switching the System Off and On................212
System Errors.......................................................212
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts....................................................................211
System Limitations.............................................211
Using the System..............................................209
Emission Control System..........................160
Cruise Control.................................................69
End User License Agreement.................496
Principle of Operation.......................................194
Type 1........................................................................69
Type 2.......................................................................69
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ................................496
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................161
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................162
Engine Block Heater....................................149
Cruise control
Using the Engine Block Heater......................150
See: Using Cruise Control................................194
Engine Coolant Check...............................263
Customer Assistance.................................238
Adding Coolant...................................................263
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................266
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................265
Recycled Coolant..............................................264
Severe Climates.................................................264
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording..........................................10
Service Data Recording........................................9
Engine Immobilizer
Daytime Running Lamps.............................76
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................65
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)........................................76
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................76
Engine Oil Check...........................................261
Adding Engine Oil...............................................261
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L
EcoBoost™..................................................261
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™/
2.5L/2.7L EcoBoost™..............................261
Engine Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™..................................................321
Digital Radio..................................................354
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................355
Direction Indicators........................................78
Driver Alert.....................................................202
Drivebelt Routing................................................321
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION..........................202
USING DRIVER ALERT....................................202
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................321
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................40
Drivebelt Routing...............................................322
Children and Airbags..........................................40
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.......................................................40
Engine Specifications - 2.5L....................322
Drivebelt Routing...............................................322
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags........44
Driving Aids....................................................202
517
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
F
Engine Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................323
Drivebelt Routing...............................................323
Fastening the Seatbelts................................31
Entertainment...............................................419
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.....................................33
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................32
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy.................31
AM/FM Radio......................................................420
Apps.......................................................................428
Bluetooth Stereo or USB.................................427
CD (If equipped)................................................426
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available).........................................................423
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).......................................................420
Sources..................................................................419
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................428
USB Port...............................................................428
Flat Tire Inflation
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................286
Floor Mats.......................................................229
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................78
Ford Credit..........................................................11
US Only......................................................................11
Front Fog Lamps............................................78
Front Parking Aid..........................................182
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................183
Environment......................................................15
EPB
Front Passenger Sensing System.............41
Fuel and Refueling.......................................153
Fuel Consumption.......................................159
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................174
Essential Towing Checks..........................224
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................160
Filling the Tank....................................................160
Before Towing a Trailer....................................225
Hitches...................................................................224
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)........................................225
Safety Chains......................................................224
Trailer Brakes.......................................................224
Trailer Lamps.......................................................224
When Towing a Trailer......................................225
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................154
Fuel Quality....................................................154
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................154
Fuel Shutoff...................................................232
Fuses................................................................245
Fuse Specification Chart..........................245
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.........251
Power Distribution Box....................................245
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
G
Export Unique Options..................................13
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................475
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA
ONLY)................................................................476
Ford Protect (U.S. Only)..................................475
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener............137
Gauges...............................................................86
Exterior Mirrors................................................82
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............87
Fuel Gauge..............................................................87
Information Display.............................................86
Left Information Display...................................88
Type 1 and 2............................................................86
Type 3.......................................................................88
Auto-Dimming Feature......................................82
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................83
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................82
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................82
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors..........................83
Memory Mirrors.....................................................82
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................82
Puddle Lamps ......................................................83
Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................83
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................48
Intelligent Access.................................................48
General Maintenance Information........477
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................479
Owner Checks and Services..........................478
Protecting Your Investment............................477
518
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
I
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................477
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................477
In California (U.S. Only)............................239
Information Display Control.......................70
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..........................................................241
Getting the Services You Need...............238
Information Display Control Features..........70
Information Displays.....................................93
Away From Home..............................................238
General Information............................................93
Global Opening and Closing......................82
Information Messages................................102
Closing the Windows..........................................82
Opening the Windows........................................82
Active Park............................................................102
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................103
AdvanceTrac®.....................................................103
Airbag.....................................................................104
Alarm......................................................................104
All-Wheel Drive...................................................106
Automatic Engine Shutdown........................106
Auto Start-Stop..................................................104
Battery and Charging System........................107
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System....................................................107
Doors and Locks.................................................108
Driver Alert............................................................108
Fuel..........................................................................108
Hill Start Assist...................................................108
Keys and Intelligent Access............................109
Lane Keeping System........................................110
Maintenance.........................................................110
MyKey........................................................................111
Park Aid....................................................................112
Park Brake...............................................................112
Power Steering.....................................................113
Pre-Collision Assist.............................................113
Remote Start.........................................................113
Seats.........................................................................114
Starting System ...................................................114
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................114
Traction Control...................................................115
Transmission.........................................................115
H
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................232
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps......................271
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................75
Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp..........................273
Head Restraints.............................................127
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................128
Tilting Head Restraints ....................................128
Heated Seats..................................................134
Heated Steering Wheel................................70
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................125
Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................125
Heated Rear Window........................................125
Heating
See: Climate Control...........................................117
Hill Start Assist..............................................176
Switching the System On and Off................177
Using Hill Start Assist........................................176
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate...........................................................122
Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................124
General Hints........................................................122
Heating the Interior Quickly............................123
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........124
Recommended Settings for Heating...........123
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................124
Installing Child Restraints.............................17
Child Seats...............................................................17
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................18
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................22
Using Tether Straps.............................................24
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.............................................................173
Home Screen..................................................411
Hood Lock
Instrument Cluster........................................86
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................75
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........256
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps......................75
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps...............75
519
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Interior Lamps.................................................78
Power Door Locks................................................58
Remote Control....................................................58
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................60
Front Interior Lamp..............................................78
Rear Interior Lamp..............................................80
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release............................................................63
Interior Mirror...................................................84
Locks...................................................................58
Lug Nuts
Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................84
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................312
Introduction.........................................................7
M
J
Maintenance.................................................256
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................233
General Information.........................................256
Connecting the Jumper Cables....................233
Jump Starting......................................................234
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................233
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................234
Manual Climate Control..............................117
Manual Seats.................................................129
Media Hub......................................................359
Memory Function...........................................131
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................133
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key
Fob.......................................................................132
Saving a PreSet Position..................................132
K
Keyless Entry.....................................................61
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad.........61
Keyless Starting............................................146
Message Center
Ignition Modes.....................................................146
See: Information Displays.................................93
Keys and Remote Controls........................48
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors...............125
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................81
L
Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof..........................................................84
Lane Keeping System................................203
Switching the System On and Off..............204
Bounce-Back.........................................................85
Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............85
Venting the Moonroof........................................85
Lighting Control...............................................73
Headlamp Flasher................................................74
High Beams.............................................................73
Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................323
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................325
Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L..............................326
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L
EcoBoost™..................................................327
MyKey Troubleshooting................................57
MyKey™.............................................................54
Lighting...............................................................73
General Information............................................73
Load Carrying..................................................217
Load Limit........................................................217
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles..............................................................221
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer..................................................................217
Principle of Operation........................................54
Locking and Unlocking.................................58
N
Activating Intelligent Access............................59
Autolock..................................................................60
Autounlock..............................................................61
Battery Saver..........................................................61
Illuminated Entry...................................................61
Illuminated Exit......................................................61
Navigation.......................................................437
cityseeker.............................................................444
Destination Mode..............................................439
Map Mode.............................................................437
520
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Power Lumbar.......................................................131
Navigation Map Updates................................445
Navigation Menu................................................442
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................445
Waypoints............................................................443
Power Windows...............................................81
Accessory Delay.....................................................81
Bounce-Back..........................................................81
One-Touch Down..................................................81
One-Touch Up........................................................81
Window Lock..........................................................81
Normal Scheduled Maintenance.........480
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor............................480
Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................481
Pre-Collision Assist......................................213
O
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System...............................................................214
Protecting the Environment........................15
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................262
Oil Check
R
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................261
Opening and Closing the Hood..............256
Closing the Hood................................................257
Opening the Hood.............................................256
Rear Parking Aid.............................................181
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................242
Rear Seat Armrest........................................136
Rear Seats.......................................................133
Rear View Camera.......................................190
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................182
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........243
Overhead Console........................................145
Camera Guidelines.............................................192
Manual Zoom.......................................................193
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................193
Rear Camera Delay............................................193
Using the Rear View Camera System..........191
P
Parking Aids.....................................................181
Rear View Camera
Principle of Operation........................................181
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................65
See: Rear View Camera...................................190
SecuriLock®...........................................................65
Recommended Towing Weights............223
Refueling..........................................................157
Remote Control..............................................48
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................65
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................38
Car Finder.................................................................51
Intelligent Access Key........................................48
Remote Start..........................................................51
Replacing the Battery.........................................50
Sounding the Panic Alarm.................................51
Using the Key Blade............................................49
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................38
Phone................................................................431
During a Phone Call..........................................435
Making Calls........................................................434
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time....................................................................431
Phone Menu.........................................................432
Receiving Calls....................................................435
Smartphone Connectivity..............................436
Text Messaging...................................................436
Remote Start..................................................125
Automatic Settings............................................126
Removing a Headlamp..............................273
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............283
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................12
Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Post-Crash Alert System..........................235
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................58
Power Seats....................................................129
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................53
10-way power seat..............................................131
6-way power seat..............................................130
521
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................243
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................243
Roadside Assistance...................................231
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................231
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage.................232
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................232
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................231
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................231
Ambient Lighting...............................................458
Bluetooth.............................................................450
Clock......................................................................449
Display...................................................................459
General..................................................................457
Media Player.......................................................448
Mobile Apps........................................................456
Navigation............................................................454
Phone....................................................................450
Radio......................................................................453
Sound....................................................................448
Valet Mode..........................................................460
Vehicle...................................................................458
Voice Control......................................................460
Wi-Fi.......................................................................458
Roadside Emergencies...............................231
Running-In
Side Airbags.....................................................43
Side Sensing System..................................183
See: Breaking-In.................................................228
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................184
Running Out of Fuel....................................156
Sitting in the Correct Position...................127
Snow Chains
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................157
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................157
See: Using Snow Chains.................................308
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions..............................................12
S
Safety Canopy™............................................44
Safety Precautions.......................................153
Satellite Radio..............................................356
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................483
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN).................................................................357
Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............357
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service..................357
Troubleshooting.................................................358
Exceptions...........................................................485
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................194
Spinout Detection.......................................235
Stability Control............................................179
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........485
Scheduled Maintenance...........................477
Seatbelt Extension.........................................37
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................34
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................35
Principle of Operation.......................................179
Starting a Gasoline Engine........................147
Automatic Engine Shutdown........................148
Failure to Start......................................................147
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................149
Important Ventilating Information...............149
Starting Your Vehicle.........................................147
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................148
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................148
Belt-Minder™........................................................35
Seatbelts...........................................................30
Principle of Operation........................................30
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime...............................................................35
Conditions of operation.....................................35
Seats..................................................................127
Security..............................................................65
Settings...........................................................448
Starting and Stopping the Engine.........146
911 Assist...............................................................453
Electric Power Steering.....................................212
General Information..........................................146
Steering.............................................................212
522
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Steering Wheel................................................67
Storage Compartments.............................144
Sunroof
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure...........................................................290
Tips for Use of the Kit.......................................287
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed...............................................................290
What to do when a Tire Is Punctured........288
See: Moonroof.......................................................84
Sun Visors.........................................................84
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................84
Tires
Supplementary Restraints System.........39
Principle of Operation........................................39
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................286
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ 3........................................................398
Towing a Trailer.............................................222
General Information.........................................398
Towing Points................................................236
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................460
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................376
Installing the Recovery Hook........................236
Recovery Hook Location.................................236
Load Placement.................................................222
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels..........................................................226
911 Assist...............................................................376
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................378
Emergency Towing............................................226
Recreational Towing.........................................226
Vehicles Equipped with 1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L
Engines.............................................................226
Vehicles Equipped with a 2.7L
Engine................................................................226
SYNC™...........................................................360
General Information.........................................360
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................390
T
Towing..............................................................222
Traction Control.............................................178
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications.............321
Principle of Operation.......................................178
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................240
Tire Care..........................................................292
Transmission Code Designation............329
Transmission..................................................163
Transmission
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................294
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................292
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall...........................................................295
Temperature A B C............................................294
Traction AA A B C...............................................293
Treadwear.............................................................293
See: Transmission..............................................163
Transporting the Vehicle...........................236
Type Approvals..............................................512
RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor(s)...................................512
U
Tire Inflation When Punctured
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L
EcoBoost™..................................................257
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................258
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L...................259
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™................................................260
Unique Driving Characteristics.................151
Universal Garage Door Opener................137
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................286
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........309
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System........................................310
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System .......................................310
Tire Repair Kit
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................286
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................286
HomeLink Wireless Control System............137
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air.......................................288
General Information..........................................287
USB Port.........................................................359
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................195
Automatic Cancellation...................................199
523
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Making Calls.........................................................367
Pairing a Phone for the First Time..............364
Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................365
Phone Options during an Active Call.........368
Phone Voice Commands...............................366
Receiving Calls...................................................368
System Settings.................................................374
Text Messaging...................................................370
Blocked Sensor..................................................200
Canceling the Set Speed.................................199
Changing the Set Speed.................................198
Detection Issues.................................................199
Following a Vehicle............................................197
Following a Vehicle to a Complete
Stop.....................................................................197
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................199
Overriding the System......................................198
Park Brake Application.....................................199
Resuming the Set Speed.................................199
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............196
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When
Your Vehicle is Stationary...........................196
Setting the Gap Distance.................................197
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................199
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................196
Switching to Normal Cruise Control............201
System Not Available......................................200
Using Traction Control................................178
Switching the System Off................................178
System Indicator Lights and
Messages..........................................................178
Using a Switch.....................................................178
Using the Information Display
Controls.............................................................178
Using Voice Recognition...........................362
Audio Voice Commands..................................413
Climate Voice Commands..............................414
Initiating a Voice Session................................362
Mobile App Voice Commands.......................416
Navigation Voice Commands........................415
Phone Voice Commands.................................414
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.......................................................417
System Interaction and Feedback..............363
Voice Settings Commands..............................417
Using All-Wheel Drive................................168
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)...............................168
Using Cruise Control...................................194
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................195
Switching Cruise Control On..........................194
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).........................241
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...........................................................57
Using Snow Chains....................................308
Using Stability Control...............................180
Using Summer Tires..................................308
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player.............................................................381
V
Vehicle Care...................................................279
General Information..........................................279
Vehicle Certification Label.......................328
Vehicle Identification Number................327
Vehicle Storage............................................284
Accessing Your USB Song Library...............385
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings.............................................................387
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port...........................................................381
Media Menu Features......................................385
Media Voice Commands.................................382
USB 2......................................................................387
Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........388
Battery...................................................................285
Body.......................................................................284
Brakes....................................................................285
Cooling system...................................................285
Engine....................................................................284
Fuel system..........................................................285
General..................................................................284
Miscellaneous.....................................................285
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................285
Tires........................................................................285
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............364
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu.................................................................369
Accessing Your Phone Settings....................372
Bluetooth Devices..............................................373
Ventilation
See: Climate Control...........................................117
524
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
VIN
Windows and Mirrors.....................................81
Windshield Washers......................................72
Windshield Wipers..........................................71
See: Vehicle Identification Number.............327
Voice Control...................................................69
Intermittent Wipe..................................................71
Speed Dependent Wipers..................................71
W
Wiper Blades
Warning Lamps and Indicators................89
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................270
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................89
Anti-Lock Braking System................................89
Auto Start-stop....................................................89
Battery.....................................................................89
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................89
Brake System........................................................89
Cruise Control.......................................................89
Direction Indicator...............................................90
Door Ajar.................................................................90
Electric Park Brake..............................................90
Engine Coolant Temperature..........................90
Engine Oil................................................................90
Fasten Seatbelt....................................................90
Front Airbag...........................................................90
Front Fog Lamps..................................................90
Grade Assist...........................................................90
Heads Up Display................................................90
High Beam..............................................................90
Hood Ajar................................................................90
Lane Keeping Aid.................................................90
Low Fuel Level........................................................91
Low Tire Pressure Warning................................91
Parking Lamps.......................................................91
Powertrain Fault....................................................91
Service Engine Soon............................................91
Sport Mode..............................................................91
Stability Control.....................................................91
Stability Control Off............................................92
Trunk Ajar................................................................92
Wipers and Washers......................................71
Washer Fluid Check....................................269
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................279
See: Wipers and Washers...................................71
Waxing............................................................280
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................312
Wheels and Tires.........................................286
Technical Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™/
2.0L EcoBoost™/2.5L.................................318
Technical Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™......................................................319
525
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Download PDF